IV-SERIES-PCSOFT_UM_207GB_244003_E_1122-4.pdf

207GB

User’s Manual(PC Software)Read this manual before use.After you read this manual, keep it in a safe place for future reference.

IV Series

Vision Sensor

1 Getting Started

4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

7 Simulator

8 Controlling with the Input/Output Line

2 Installation and Connection

5 Operating/Adjusting

9 Specifications

3 Basic Operation

6 Useful Features/ Various Functions

A Status Table, Troubleshooting

Introduction

IntroductionRead this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance.Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time.

SymbolsThe following symbols alert you to important messages.Be sure to read these messages carefully.

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product damage as well as property damage.

It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.

It indicates additional information on proper operation.

It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.

It indicates the reference pages in this manual or the reference pages in separate manuals.

Cautions(1) Unauthorized reproduction of this manual in whole or part is prohibited.(2) The contents of this manual may be changed for improvements without prior notice.(3) An utmost effort has been made to ensure the contents of this manual are as complete as possible. If

there are any mistakes or questions, please contact a KEYENCE office listed in the back of the manual.(4) Regardless of item (3), KEYENCE will not be liable for any effect resulting from the use of this unit.(5) Any manuals with missing pages or other paging faults will be replaced.

The company names and product names used in this manual are registered trademarks or the trademarks of their respective companies.

1

Safety Information for IV Series

207GB

General Precautions

yDo not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or a part of human body. yThis product is not intended for use as an explosion-proof product. Do not use this product in hazardous location and/or potentially explosive atmosphere.

yYou must verify that the IV Series are operating correctly in terms of functionality and performance before the start and the operation of the IV Series. yWe recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any damage in the event of a problem occurring.

yKEYENCE never warrants the function or performance of the IV Series if it is used in manner that differs from the IV Series specifications contained in this instruction manual or if the IV Series are modified by yourself. yWhen the IV Series is used in combination with other instruments, functions and performance may be degraded, depending on operating conditions and the surrounding environment. yDo not place the instruments, including peripherals, under the rapid temperature change. It may cause condensation and may damage instruments or peripherals. yRemove the power cable from the power supply if you do not use this product for a long time.

Safety precautions on LED product

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Follow the instructions mentioned in this manual. Otherwise, injury to the human body (eyes and skin) may result.

yDo not stare into the direct or specularly reflected beam. yDo not disassemble this product. The laser radiation emission from this product is not automatically stopped when it is disassembled. yDo not direct the beam at people or into areas where people might be present. yBe careful of the path of the LED beam. If there is a possibility that the operator may be exposed to the specular or diffuse reflections, block the beam by installing a protective enclosure. y Install this product so that the path of the LED beam is not as the same height as that of human eye.

Safety Information for IV Series

2 - IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Important Instructions

Precautions on use

yThe power of this product and instruments connected to this product must be turned off when the cable is to be installed or removed. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or a product damage. yUse this product in the correct supply voltage. Failure to do so may cause a product damage.

yFor instructions yDo not turn OFF the power while setting the items or saving the settings. Otherwise, all or part of the setting data may be lost. yDo not let water, dust or oil stick to the camera/light of the sensor. Failure to do so may cause a malfunction. yWhen this product becomes dirty, do not rub it with a wet cloth, benzene, thinner, or alcohol. Doing so may change the color or shape of the unit. y If the unit is heavily contaminated, disconnect all the cables including the power supply cable, wipe off the dirt with a cloth soaked with mild detergent, and then wipe with a soft dry cloth.

yFor external master image registrationIf the external master image registration is to be performed frequently, set [Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save] of the input option to [No] for nonvolatile memory protection of the internal sensor. When the option is set to [Yes], the nonvolatile memory is guaranteed to write for 100,000 times. yFor automatic focus function

yAutomatic focus function is used for adjusting the focusing position at the time of installation. This will not activate during the operation. yFocusing position can be registered in each program. The program configurations are guaranteed to switch for 100,000 times. If the focusing position does not need to change for each program, set [Auto Focus Adjustment Position] to [Common] for extending the life-span. yDo not apply shock or vibration during the focusing position adjustment. Failure to do so may cause a product damage.

Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs

In the following cases, turn the power OFF immediately. Using the IV Series in an abnormal condition could cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.Contact our office for repair.

y If water or debris enters the IV Series. y If the IV Series is dropped or the case is damaged. y If abnormal smoke or odor emanates from the IV Series.

Important InstructionsObserve the following precautions to prevent malfunction of the IV Series and to ensure that it is used properly.

3- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Important Instructions

Precautions on installation

yTo use this product correctly and safely, avoid installing it in the following locations. Failure to do so may cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.

yOutdoors yAltitude above 2000 m yLocations that are humid, dusty or poorly ventilated yLocations where the temperature is high such as those exposed to direct sunlight yLocations where there are flammable or corrosive gases yLocations where the unit may be directly subjected to vibration or impact yLocations where water, oil, or chemicals may splash onto the unit

yTo improve the anti-noise feature, install the unit following the precautions below. Otherwise, a malfunction may occur.

yMount the sensor onto the insulated attached mounting adapter. yGround the FG cable (drain cable) of the sensor. yDo not mount the unit in a cabinet where high-voltage equipment is already installed. yMount the unit as far from power lines as possible. ySeparate the unit as far as possible from the devices that emit strong electric or magnetic field (such as solenoid or chopper). ySeparate the I/O signal line from the power line or high-voltage line.

yFor power supply yNoise superimposed on the power supply could cause malfunction. Use a stabilized DC power supply configured with an isolation transformer. yWhen using a commercially available switching regulator, be sure to ground the frame ground terminal.

yDevices including this unit are precision components. Do not apply shock or vibration. yWhen connecting to a network, let engineers who are knowledgeable about networks handle it.


Precautions on Regulations and Standards

For IV-500C/IV-500CA/IV-500M/IV-500MA/IV-150M/IV-150MA/ IV-2000M/IV-2000MA

UL CertificationThis product is a UL/C-UL Listed product.

yUL File No. E301717 yCategory NRKH, NRKH7

Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a UL/C-UL Listed Product. yUse a power supply with Class 2 output defined in NFPA70 (NEC: National Electrical Code). yPower supply/ External input/ Control output shall be connected to a single Class 2 source only. yUse with an over current protection device which is rated 24 V or more and not more than 1A. yEnclosure Type 1 (Based on UL50)

CE MarkingKeyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of the applicable EC Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product in the Member State of European Union.

zz EMC Directive (2004/108/EC) yApplicable Standard EMI: EN60947-5-2, Class A

EMS: EN60947-5-2 yThe length of power I/O cable, Ethernet cable and Monitor cable must be less than or equal to 30m.

Remarks: These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.

zz Low-Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC) yApplicable Standard: EN62471




Software License AgreementNOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY PORTION OF THE [IV-H1] (THIS “SOFTWARE”), YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ANY TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THIS SOFTWARE.

1. Definition1.1 “use” or “using” means to access, install, download, copy or otherwise benefit from using the

functionality of this Software.1.2 “This Software” means the software and all associated documentation provided by KEYENCE.

2. Grant of License.Conditioned upon compliance with all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, KEYENCE grants you a nonexclusive and nontransferable license to install this Software on all computers in order to use the KEYENCE product. You may make one copy of this Software for backup or archive purposes only.

3. Restrictions.3.1 Except for installation of updates or new functions provided by KEYENCE, you may not modify or

add any function to this Software.3.2 You may not reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble this Software.3.3 You may not create derivative works based on this Software.3.4 Other than expressly stated by KEYENCE, you may not resell, retransfer, rent or otherwise

redistribute this Software to any third parties.

4. Intellectual Property Rights.Except as expressly stated herein, KEYENCE reserves all right, title and interest in this Software, and all associated copyrights, trademarks, and other intellectual property rights therein.

5. Disclaimer.Keyence is licensing this Software to you “AS IS” and without any warranty of any kind. In no event will KEYENCE or its suppliers be liable to you for any damages,claims, costs or any lost profits caused by using this Software.

6. Termination.6.1 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically if you destroy this Software and the

copy of this Software in your possession or voluntarily return this Software to us.6.2 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically without any notice from KEYENCE

if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Promptly upon termination, you shall cease all use of this Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of this Software in your possession or control.

6.3 You will compensate KEYENCE for costs or any lost profits caused by your violation or breach of any term of this Agreement.

7. Governing Law.7.1 This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws of

Japan without regards to the principles of conflicts of law.7.2 If any part of this Agreement is found void and unenforceable, it will not affect the validity of the

balance of this Agreement, which shall remain valid and enforceable according to its terms and conditions.


Version of the IV Series

Version of the IV Series

You can download the most recent operation software for the sensor (IV-150/500/2000) and IV-Navigator (IV-H1) from the KEYENCE web site. Please refer to the description on the homepage for the introduction method.URL : http://www.keyence.com/

Operation software of the sensor (IV-150/500/2000)

Version Description

R1.00.00 The initial version.

R1.01.00 The processing time has been speeded up.

R1.10.00 The processing time and the response time to program switching input have been speeded up.

R2.00.00

This is the version of this document.The following functions have been added.

y Logic output yTotal status NG output yRUN output yFTP client function yField network (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET)

IV-Navigator (IV-H1)

Version Description

R1.00.00 The initial version.

R1.01.00 Compatibility with German.

R1.02.00 Compatibility with Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional).

R1.10.00

The following functions have been added. yAddition of the IV-Simulator function yAddition of the image capture function to the o peration of the [Save Image] button yAddition of the [Size] selection function to “Remove Outline” yAddition of the [Display Master Image] button to “Tool Auto Tuning” yAddition of the [Language] button (language selection) to the Activation Menu screen

R2.00.00This is the version of this document.Compatibility with Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean.IVP-Convertor has been added.


Structure of This Manual

1 Getting StartedThis chapter explains the system configuration and overview of IV Series, package contents, and names and functions of each part.

2 Installation and Connection

This chapter explains the procedures for installing and connecting the sensor and for setting up the PC.

3 Basic Operation This chapter explains the basic operation and operation flow of the IV Series.

4 Settings Navigator(Setting the Judgment Condition)

This chapter explains how to set the sensors using the Settings Navigator.

5 Operating/Adjusting This chapter explains how to operate and adjust the IV Series.

6 Useful Features/ Various Functions

This chapter explains the useful and detailed features.

7 Simulator This chapter explains the functions and operations of the Simulator.

8 Controlling with the Input/Output Line

This chapter explains how the input and output terminals control each operation.

9 Specifications This chapter explains specifications and dimensions.

A Appendices This chapter explains error messages and troubleshooting, etc.

Structure of This Manual

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A


Contents

IntroductionSymbolsCautions

Safety Information for IV Series..............................1General Precautions ...........................................1Safety precautions on LED product ....................1

Important Instructions .............................................2Precautions on use .............................................2Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs..................................................................2Precautions on installation ..................................3

Precautions on Regulations and Standards ...........4For IV-500C/IV-500CA/IV-500M/IV-500MA/ IV-150M/IV-150MA/IV-2000M/IV-2000MA ...........4

UL Certification ................................................4CE Marking ......................................................4

Software License Agreement ..............................5Version of the IV Series ..........................................6

Operation software of the sensor (IV-150/500/2000) ...............................................6IV-Navigator (IV-H1) ............................................6

Structure of This Manual ........................................7Contents .................................................................8

Chapter 1 Getting StartedSystem Configuration ..........................................1-2

Basic configurations of IV-Series .....................1-2Connecting the PC and single sensor ..........1-2Connecting the PC and multiple sensors......1-3

Overview of IV Series ..........................................1-4IV Series...........................................................1-4

Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) ..............1-4Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) ...1-5

Judgment processing flow................................1-6Checking the Package Contents .........................1-8

Sensor ..............................................................1-8Optional parts for the sensor ............................1-8

Dome attachment .........................................1-8Polarized visible light filter attachment..........1-8Infrared polarization filter attachment ...........1-8Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - stranded wire) ..........................1-9Mounting adapter ..........................................1-9Front cover (for replacement) .......................1-9Bracket..........................................................1-9

Communication cables ...................................1-10Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)..............1-10NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) ......................................1-10

IV Software.....................................................1-10Name and Function of Each Part ......................1-11

Sensor ............................................................1-11z� Name and function of each part of the sensor ...........................................1-11z� Operation of the indicator light ............1-12

Chapter 2 Installation and ConnectionMounting the Sensor ...........................................2-2

Checking the view and installed distance ........2-2Mounting the sensor.........................................2-4

Mounting the mounting adapter ....................2-4z� Mounting on the wall .............................2-4z� Mounting from the jig side .....................2-4

Mounting the sensor onto the mounting adapter ....................................2-4

Unmounting the sensor ....................................2-5Mounting the attachment..................................2-6

Using the dome attachment ..........................2-6z� Mounting the dome attachment ............2-6z� Installed distance of the dome attachment ............................2-6

Using the polarizing filter attachment............2-7Cables .................................................................2-8

Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor ...2-8Specification of the circuit and current of the sensor ......................................................2-10

Input circuit .................................................2-10z� No-voltage input (When the NPN output is selected) ....2-10z� Voltage input (When the PNP output is selected) .....2-10

Output circuit...............................................2-10z�When the NPN output is selected .......2-10z�When the PNP output is selected .......2-10

Connecting the sensor and the PC ................2-11Connecting directly ....................................2-11Connecting via network ..............................2-11Connecting the Ethernet cable ...................2-12

Setting up the PC ..............................................2-14Required environment for the PC to be connected..................................................2-14

OS...............................................................2-14Hardware ....................................................2-14Operating conditions ...................................2-14

Installing the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) ..................2-14Installation destination of the software (reference)......................................................2-15Deleting the software (uninstall) .....................2-15Changing the PC settings (IP address setting) ........................................2-16

For Windows 7 ............................................2-16For Windows XP .........................................2-16

Chapter 3 Basic OperationOverview of Screen and Operation .....................3-2Basic Operation Flow ..........................................3-4Operation when the Power is Turned on .............3-5

Operation flow when the power is turned on ....3-5Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Direct Connection) ...............3-6Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Network Connection)............3-6

Starting the IV-Navigator...............................3-6Searching for a sensor to be connected .......3-7

Contents


Contents

Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address .....................................................3-8

Operation for initial startup of the sensor .........3-9Resetting to the Factory Default Settings ..........3-10

Initializing the sensor......................................3-10Basic Operation for Tools ..................................3-11

Operating the image tool bar..........................3-11Editing the tool window ..................................3-12

Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Settings Navigator ...............................................4-2Flow in the Settings Navigator .........................4-2

Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator...........4-3Starting the Settings Navigator ........................4-3Settings Navigator screen and operation flow ...4-4Finishing the Settings Navigator ......................4-5

Finishing by completing all steps ..................4-5Finishing without completing the steps .........4-5

1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target) ...4-6Setting the Image Optimization ........................4-6Main screen for the Image Optimization ..........4-7Setting the Trigger Options ..............................4-8

Settings for the Trigger Options ....................4-8Setting the Trigger Options .........................4-10

Brightness Adjustment ...................................4-11Brightness Adjustment settings...................4-11Adjusting brightness ...................................4-12

Focus Adjustment...........................................4-13Focus adjustment for the auto focusing type.................................4-13Focus adjustment for the manual focusing type ............................4-14

Extended Functions for the Image Optimization ..................................4-16

Items of extended functions for the Image Optimization ...............................4-16Imaging Area...............................................4-17Digital Zoom (monochrome type only) ........4-18Color filters (color type only) .......................4-18Lighting .......................................................4-19

2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment) .......4-20

Main screen for the Master Registration ........4-20Registering the master image ........................4-21

Registering the Live image as a master image ...........................................4-21Master registration from the image history in the sensor ...................4-22Master registration using the file saved in the PC ...............................4-23z�When using batch backup files (*.iva) ...4-23z�When using image capture files (*.ivp) ..................................................4-24

Extended Functions for the Master Registration ..................................4-25

Items of extended functions for the Master Registration...............................4-25Brightness Correction .................................4-25

3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets) .......4-28

Selecting a tool according to its intended purpose .......................................4-28Types of tools .................................................4-28Main screen for the Tool settings ...................4-30Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a tool ..........4-31

Adding a tool ...............................................4-31Editing a tool ...............................................4-31Copying a tool .............................................4-32Deleting a tool .............................................4-32

Outline tool .....................................................4-34Setting items for the Outline tool.................4-34Setting the Outline tool ...............................4-35z� Setting a search region .......................4-37z� Setting a sensitivity .............................4-37z� Settings for removing outlines ............4-38z� Setting a tool name .............................4-38

Extended Functions for the Outline tool......4-39z� Rotation Range ...................................4-39z� Margin .................................................4-40z� Search Algorithm ................................4-40

Color Area/Area tool .......................................4-42Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool ....4-42Setting the Color Area/Area tool .................4-44z� Mask settings ......................................4-47z� Setting the upper limit .........................4-48z� Setting the tool name ..........................4-49

Extended Functions of the Color Area/Area tool .............................4-50z� Advanced settings for color extraction (for color type only) .............................4-51z� Fixed Reference Area .........................4-51

Position Adjustment tool .................................4-53Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool .......................4-54Setting the position adjustment tool ............4-55z� Setting a search region .......................4-57z� Setting a sensitivity .............................4-57z� Settings for disabling outlines .............4-58

Extended Functions for the Position Adjustment tool .......................4-59z� Rotation Range ...................................4-59z� Margin .................................................4-59

4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)...4-60

Main screen for the Output Assignment .........4-60Setting range of the Output Assignment ........4-61

z� Default value .......................................4-61Setting the Output Assignment.......................4-61Extended functions for the Output Assignment ...................................4-62

Extended functions items for the Output Assignment .................................................4-62

Setting the Total Status Conditions ................4-63Setting Logics.................................................4-64


Contents

Chapter 5 Operating/AdjustingStarting an Operation ..........................................5-2

Turning on the power and starting an operation ........................................5-2Exiting the sensor settings and starting an operation ..........................................................5-2

Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]........5-3Names and Functions of the Screen in [Run] / [Program] .................................................5-4

Main screen in [Run] / [Program] .....................5-4Enlarging the image display .............................5-6Selecting the tool whose information to be displayed .....................................................5-6

z� Selecting the tool from the status gauge ...................................5-6z� Selecting the tool by clicking it on the image .........................5-6

Selecting a display method for tools ................5-7Display methods for tools .............................5-7z� For color type ........................................5-7z� For monochrome type ...........................5-8

Displaying the statistical information ..............5-10Displaying the statistical information...........5-10Hiding the statistical information .................5-11

Displaying the tool information .......................5-12Displaying the tool information....................5-12Hiding the tool information ..........................5-13

Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment ...................5-14Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition) ...................................5-15

z� Using the images taken in the Test mode .....................................5-15z� Using the image history saved in the sensor ...........................................5-15z� Using the image files saved in the PC ...5-15

Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning .........5-16The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning ......5-16Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning .................5-17Registering the OK/NG images to be used for the Tool Auto Tuning .........................5-19

Register the images taken with the sensor....5-19Registering the images from the image history saved in the sensor ........5-21Registering the image files saved in the PC .........................................................5-23

Confirming or deleting the images registered for the Tool Auto Tuning ................5-26

Confirming the OK/NG images ...................5-26Deleting the OK/NG images .......................5-26

Confirming the registration results in the test mode .................................................5-27Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration information ..............5-27

Stabilizing the Judgment Process .....................5-29Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear image of the target ...................5-29

Imaging the target widely ............................5-29z� Adjusting the installed distance (WD) ...5-29z� Using the digital zooming function ......5-29

Correcting the distorted images due to the installation .............................................5-30Achieving adequate image brightness ........5-30z� If brightness cannot be adjusted in the Automatic Brightness Adjustment ...5-30z� If brightness cannot be adjusted due to uneven brightness ...................5-30

Achieving good focus..................................5-31z� If good focus cannot be achieved by the Automatic Focus Adjustment ........5-31

Reducing the image blur .............................5-31Reducing the shininess of the glossy or metal surface ..............................................5-32z� Using the Automatic Brightness Adjustment ..........................................5-32z� Using the dome attachment ................5-32z� Using the polarizing filter attachment ...5-32z� Installing the sensor at an angle .........5-32

Adjusting the color tint (for color type only) 5-33Reducing the effect of illumination variation ......5-33

Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned target position ...........................................................5-33

z� Tool settings ........................................5-33z� Processing during an operation ..........5-33

Stabilizing the position adjustment .................5-34z� Basic adjustments ...............................5-34z� If the target tilts and the position adjustment becomes unstable ............5-34z� If the position adjustment becomes unstable due to the effect of the unwanted outlines ...............................................5-34z� If the outline of the reference target cannot be detected .........................................5-35

Stabilizing the Outline tool..............................5-35z� Basic adjustments ...............................5-35z� If the outline cannot be detected when the target becomes out of position ............5-35z� If the detection becomes unstable due to the effect of the unwanted outline other than the target .....................................5-35z� If the target tilts and the outline cannot be detected ..............................................5-36z� If the match rate difference between the high and low-quality-targets is small ...5-36z� If the outline of the target cannot be detected ..............................................5-36

Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool ...............5-36z� Basic adjustments ...............................5-36z� If the color you wish to judge cannot be extracted .............................................5-36z� If the area search becomes unstable due to unwanted colors being extracted ....5-36

Shortening the Processing Time........................5-37For the processing time..................................5-37

z� Flow of the internal process ................5-37Shortening the imaging processing time ........5-38Selecting the tool............................................5-38Shortening the processing time of each tool ..5-38

Shortening the processing time of the Outline


Contents

tool ..............................................................5-38Shortening the processing time of the Color Area/Area tool .............................................5-39Shortening the processing time of the position adjustment ..................................................5-39

Chapter 6 Useful Features/Various Functions

List of the Useful Features...................................6-2Useful features while running ...........................6-2Useful features during installation/adjustment ...6-3

Changeover for a Target (Program Functions) ....6-6Overview of the program functions ..................6-6Things can be performed with the program functions ...........................................................6-6Preparing the program functions ......................6-7

Preparation flow ............................................6-7Preparation procedures ................................6-7

Using the program functions (changing over) ................................................6-9

When switching the program in the main screen in [Run] ...............................6-9When switching the program in the Program Details screen ..........................6-9When switching the program by the external input ........................................6-10

Displaying the Program Details screen ..........6-11Editing a program name .................................6-12Copying a program.........................................6-12Importing a program .......................................6-13Initializing a program ......................................6-14

Sensor's Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG) ............6-15

Displaying the Sensor's internal image history screen .................................................6-16

z� Displaying from the main screen in [Run] ...................................................6-16z� Displaying from the main screen in [Program] ............................................6-16

Loading and confirming the saved images.....6-17Saving all the image histories individually ......6-18Backing up the image history in a batch ........6-19Clearing the saved images.............................6-19Changing the logging conditions of the image history ............................................6-20

Saving the Sensor Settings and Images ...........6-21Saving the sensor settings or the image history ............................................6-21

Backing up in a batch .................................6-21Saving images and screens displayed on the IV-Navigator individually .......................6-22z� Saving procedure ................................6-22z� Confirming the saving destination of an image .............................................6-22z� Changing the saving destination of an image ............................................6-22

Transferring the backed up settings to the sensor ......................................................6-23Folder composition and file naming rules.......6-25

Setting the Input and Output Information of the Sensor .........................................................6-26

Input Settings .................................................6-26Output Settings ..............................................6-27I/O Monitor .....................................................6-28I/O Polarity .....................................................6-28

Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor .........................................................6-30

Advanced settings for the sensor ...................6-30[Environmental] tab .....................................6-30[FTP] tab .....................................................6-30[Setup Adjustment] tab................................6-30[Backup] tab ................................................6-31[Initialize/Update] tab ..................................6-31[Sensor Information] tab .............................6-31

Environmental ................................................6-31Setting a device name ................................6-31Changing the network settings ...................6-32

Field Network .................................................6-33Security ..........................................................6-34

z� Setting the password lock ...................6-34Auto Focus Adjustment Position (auto focus type only) .....................................6-35FTP ................................................................6-36Tilt Correction .................................................6-40White Balance (for color type only) ................6-42Image display direction ..................................6-43Batch Backup .................................................6-44Transfer Program Settings .............................6-44Initialize Sensor ..............................................6-44Update Sensor ...............................................6-44Sensor Information .........................................6-44

Operating from the menu bar ............................6-45[File] menu .....................................................6-45

Batch Backup..............................................6-45Transfer Program Settings ..........................6-45Export .........................................................6-45z� Program Settings List .........................6-45z� Statistics/Histogram Data ...................6-45

Exit ..............................................................6-46[View] menu ...................................................6-46

Statistics .....................................................6-46Tool Data.....................................................6-46

[Sensor] menu ................................................6-47Disconnect ..................................................6-47Reset Statistics ...........................................6-47Initialize Sensor ..........................................6-47Sensor Update ............................................6-47

[Image] menu .................................................6-47Zoom...........................................................6-47z� Zoom Out ............................................6-47z� Zoom In ...............................................6-47z� Fit to Window ......................................6-47

Tool Display Options ...................................6-47Manual Trigger ............................................6-48Capture .......................................................6-48z� Save Image .........................................6-48z� Show saved image file location ..........6-48z� Change saved image file location .......6-48

[Setting] menu ................................................6-48


Contents

Manual trigger button ..................................6-48Image while Running ..................................6-48Language ....................................................6-49

[Window] menu ..............................................6-49Program Details ..........................................6-49Sensor’s Internal Image History .................6-49I/O Settings .................................................6-49Advanced Sensor Settings .........................6-49

[Help] menu ....................................................6-50User's Manual .............................................6-50Version information .....................................6-50

Converting IVP Data to BMP Data Using the IVP-Converter....................................6-51

Installing the IVP-Converter ...........................6-51Starting up the IVP-Converter ........................6-51Main screen of the IVP Converter ..................6-51Converting IVP data to BMP data ..................6-52

Chapter 7 SimulatorSimulator .............................................................7-2

z� Sensor Setup Simulation ......................7-2z� IV Sensor Simulation ............................7-2z� Confirming the image history ................7-2

Basic Operation of Simulator ...............................7-3Operation flow of the Simulator ........................7-3Saving the batch backup file ............................7-3Starting the Simulator.......................................7-4Simulator screen and operation flow ................7-4Exiting the Simulator ........................................7-5Transferring to the sensor ................................7-5

Names and Functions of the Screen ...................7-6Main screen of the Simulator ...........................7-6

Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation) ....7-8Settings Navigator screen and operation flow ....7-81. Image Optimization ......................................7-9

Main screen for the Image Optimization .......7-92. Master Registration ....................................7-10

Main screen for the Master Registration .....7-10Registering the master image .....................7-11z� Master registration from the image history in the sensor ...........7-11z� Master registration using the file saved in the PC ..................................7-11

3. Tool Settings ...............................................7-12Main screen for the Tool settings ................7-12

4. Output Assignment .....................................7-13Main screen for the Output Assignment......7-13

IV Sensor Simulation .........................................7-14Main screen of the IV Sensor Simulation .......7-14

For Outline/Position Adjustment tool...........7-14For Color Area/Area tool ............................7-16

Starting the IV Sensor Simulation ..................7-17Operating from the menu bar ............................7-18

[File] menu .....................................................7-18Open file .....................................................7-18Save............................................................7-18

Export .........................................................7-18z� Save Program Settings List ................7-18z� Save Statistics/Histogram Data in operation .............................................7-18

Check Statistics/Histogram in operation .....7-19Terminate IV-Simulator ...............................7-19Exit ..............................................................7-19

[View] menu ...................................................7-19Message when activating IV Sensor Simulator ....................................7-19

[Image] menu .................................................7-20Zoom...........................................................7-20z� Reduce ...............................................7-20z� Enlarge ...............................................7-20z� Fit to Window ......................................7-20

Tool Display Options ...................................7-20Capture .......................................................7-20z� Save Image .........................................7-20z� Show saved image file location ..........7-20z� Change saved image file location .......7-20

[Setting] menu ................................................7-20Language ....................................................7-20

[Window] menu ..............................................7-21Program Details ..........................................7-21Sensor’s Internal Image History .................7-21I/O Settings .................................................7-21Advanced Sensor Settings .........................7-21

[Help] menu ....................................................7-21User's Manual .............................................7-21Version information .....................................7-21

Chapter 8 Controlling with Input/Output Line

Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers......8-2External trigger .................................................8-2Internal trigger ..................................................8-3

Operating in the shortest cycle .....................8-3Importing the Status Output.................................8-4

Importing the total status / total status NG output ......................................8-4Importing the individual status output of each detection tool / logic.................................8-5Changing the timing of the status output..........8-6

Cancelling One-Shot output..........................8-6Changing Over ....................................................8-7Registering the Master Image .............................8-8Clearing Errors ..................................................8-10Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on ..........................................................8-11Input Response Time.........................................8-12

Response time for the switch program input.............................8-12Response time for the external master registration input .........................................8-12Response time for the error clear input ......8-12Description for symbols ..............................8-12


Contents

Chapter 9� SpecificationsSpecifications ......................................................9-2

Sensor ..............................................................9-2IV Software.......................................................9-4

Dimensions ..........................................................9-5Sensor ..............................................................9-5Optional parts for the sensor ............................9-6

Dome attachment .........................................9-6Polarizing filter attachment ...........................9-7Front cover....................................................9-7Mounting adapter ..........................................9-7Power I/O cable ............................................9-7Bracket..........................................................9-8

Communication cables .....................................9-8Ethernet cable...............................................9-8NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable ................9-8

AppendicesStatus Table ........................................................ A-2

Status table ..................................................... A-2Displaying and outputting the status result ..... A-4Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment ....................... A-4

Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool .................................................. A-5

Matching rate at the time of protrusion............ A-5Cut-off process of the matching rate ............... A-5

Settings List ........................................................ A-6Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup) screen ...... A-6

1 Image Optimization .................................. A-62 Master Registration.................................. A-73 Tool Settings ............................................ A-74 Output Assignment ................................ A-10

Program Details screen................................. A-11I/O Settings screen........................................ A-12Advanced screen .......................................... A-13

Troubleshooting ................................................ A-16Error Messages ................................................ A-19

Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor ... A-19Confirming error messages of the IV-Navigator ............................................ A-21

Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor ................................................. A-25

Remedy when direct connection is unavailable .................................................... A-25Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable ................................ A-26Confirming the status by observing the indicator light of the sensor ..................... A-29

LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light ........ A-29STATUS indicator light ............................... A-30

Other methods of confirming a network connection ..................................................... A-31

Confirming the existence of the sensor from the PC .............................. A-31Confirming/Setting the IP address of the PC ............................ A-31

Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor .................................................. A-31Confirming the router settings.................... A-32Confirming the firewall settings .................. A-32Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable................................................. A-33

Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch) .............................................. A-35

Settings after initialization ............................. A-35Connecting method after initialization ........... A-35

z� For direct connection ......................... A-35z� For network connection ..................... A-35

Initializing the network settings ..................... A-35Maintenance ..................................................... A-36

Replacing the front cover .............................. A-36Index ................................................................. A-38


Contents

MEMO

1-1- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

This chapter explains the system configurations and overview of IV Series, how to check package contents, and the name and function of each part.

System Configuration .......................................1-2Overview of IV Series ........................................1-4Checking the Package Contents ......................1-8Name and Function of Each Part ...................1-11

1

Getting Started1

Getting Started

1-2 - IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

System Configuration

Basic configurations of IV-Series

Connecting the PC and single sensor

IV Software (IV-Navigator)IV-H1

IV Series

SensorIV-500CIV-500CAIV-500MIV-500MAIV-150MIV-150MAIV-2000MIV-2000MA

Power I/O cable(2m/5m/10m)

(Optional)Dome attachmentIV-D10

Polarizing filter attachmentOP-87436/OP-87437

Photoelectric/proximity sensor etc.Sends the signal to the trigger input when the target is detected.

Indicator light/buzzer etc.Alarm can be output by the status output function.

PLCPLC can control the trigger input and the status output function, and can switch the program number.

24 VDC power

Ethernet cable(2m/5m/10m)


1

Getting Started



Connecting the PC and multiple sensorsWhen the network is connected, the PC that the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) for IV Software is installed can be connected by selecting a single sensor from among multiple sensors.* Each sensor requires the power I/O cable.* A single PC cannot be connected with multiple sensors at the same time.


Ethernet switch

IV Software (IV-Navigator)IV-H1

1

Getting Started


Overview of IV Series


IV SeriesThe IV Series is an all-in-one “Vision Sensor” featuring a camera, a light, and a controller. This sensor can be attached easily so complicated detection operations such as detecting the shapes of parts with a photoelectric switch can be achieved easily.Operation conditions settings require the IV Software, IV-Navigator (IV-H1) or the intelligent monitor (IV-M30). After setting is completed, the sensor can be operated independently.The sensor with monitor and the sensor with PC are connected via an Ethernet so network connection with multiple sensors besides direct single connection can be performed.

Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)

Power I/O

Functions of sensor yCamera y Lighting y Image detection y I/O ySaving the image history

Functions of IV-Navigator ySetting the sensor yMonitoring the operation screen yMonitoring the statistical information yReading the image history ySimulator

zz Direct connection zz Network connection

Ethernet switch

1

Getting Started



Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)IV-M30 is the dedicated monitor with a touch panel.For details of IV-M30, refer to "IV Series User's Manual (Monitor)".

Power I/O

Functions of sensor yCamera y Lighting y Image detection y I/O ySaving the image history

Functions of monitor ySetting the sensor yMonitoring the operation screen yMonitoring the statistical information yReading the image history

zz Direct connection zz Network connection

Ethernet switch

1

Getting Started



Judgment processing flowThis section describes the basic judgment processing flow of this device.

Trigger input

BUSY outputTotal status output

Trigger inputInputs the imaging startup signal by synchronizing to the target position from a photoelectric switch or PLC.Also, the trigger can be input at a regular interval with an internal trigger function.

ImagingLight up the built-in light and image the target by using the CMOS image sensor. BUSY output function turns ON.

Status outputOutputs the status results.When the total status result is OK, the total status output is ON.When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output is ON.

Save imagesSaves the image to the image history memory in the sensor.Conditions for saving the image can be selected from "NG only" or "All".Color type can save 100 images, and monochrome type can save 300 images.

Tool processingAccording to the settings of a detection tool, the image of the target is scanned for detecting whether a target is high or low quality.Up to 16 detection tools can be set. Also, misaligned positions of the target can be corrected by using the position adjustment tool.After the detection process is completed, the BUSY output function turns OFF.

1

Getting Started



MEMO

1

Getting Started


Checking the Package Contents


IV Series are constructed by each following model. Check that all the following packed items are packed for each model you purchased before using.

Sensor

y IV-500C y IV-500CA

y IV-150M y IV-150MA



Sensor x 1

Mounting adapter x 1Screw for mounting adapter x 1

Waterproof cap for Ethernet connector x 1

Flathead screwdriver x 1(Manual focus type only)

Instruction Manual x 1The mounting adapter is mounted with the sensors in the default factory setting.

“Name and Function of Each Part” (Page 1-11) “Mounting the Sensor” (Page 2-2) “Cables” (Page 2-8)

Optional parts for the sensor

Dome attachment y IV-D10

Dome attachment × 1

Mounting screw x 2

Hexagon wrench (L-shaped) x 1

Instruction Manual x 1

“Using the dome attachment” (Page 2-6)“Using the dome attachment” (Page 2-6)

Polarized visible light filter attachment yOP-87436

Polarized visible light filter attachment x 1

Mounting screw x 2


“Using the polarizing filter attachment” (Page 2-7)

Infrared polarization filter attachment yOP-87437

Infrared polarization filter attachment

Mounting screw x 2



1

Getting Started



Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - stranded wire)

yOP-87440 (2m) yOP-87441 (5m) yOP-87442 (10m)

Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire) x 1

Mounting adapter yOP-87460

Mounting adapter x 1

Screw for the mounting adapter x 1

Same as accessories for the sensor.Optional parts in case of loss/damage.

Front cover (for replacement) yOP-87461

Front cover (for replacement) x 1

Mounting screw x 2

O-shaped ring (Small x 2, Large x 1)

Hexagon wrench (L-shaped) x 1


Optional parts for replacement. “Replacing the front cover” (Page A-36)

Bracket yOP-87685

Bracket A x 1

Bracket B x 1

Screw for the bracket and nut x 1

Mounting screw x 4

1

Getting Started



Communication cables

Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) yOP-87454 (2m) yOP-87455 (5m) yOP-87456 (10m)

Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) x 1

NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)

yOP-87457 (2m) yOP-87458 (5m) yOP-87459 (10m)

NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) x 1

IV Software y IV-H1

CD-ROM × 1

Instruction Manual x 1Starting Guide x 1

“Installing the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)” (Page 2-14)

1

Getting Started


Name and Function of Each Part


Sensor

z� Name and function of each part of the sensor

12

3

4

5

6

78

1 Mounting adapterUse this for mounting and fixing the sensor.

“Mounting the Sensor” (Page 2-2)

2 Connector for power I/O cableConnector for connecting the power I/O cable.Use this for supplying the power to the sensor and for connecting with external devices.

“Cables” (Page 2-8)

3 Focusing position adjustment screw (manual focus type only)Adjusts the focus of the displayed image.

“Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13)

4 Connector for monitor cable/Ethernet cableConnector for connecting a monitor cable or Ethernet cable. Use this for connecting the monitor, PC, or Ethernet switch.

“Cables” (Page 2-8)

When the cable is not connected, attach the waterproof cap for Ethernet connector to maintain enclosure rating.Tightening torque : 0.45 to 0.55 N·m

5 Indicator lightIndicates the operating status of the sensor.

“Operation of the indicator light” (Page 1-12)

6 Built-in lightLED light that illuminates the target

7 CameraImages the object.

8 Front coverProtects the camera and built-in lights.The front cover is protected by the protection sheet (blue) in the default factory setting. Remove the sheet when the sensor is to be used.Front cover for replacement is provided for maintenance.

“Replacing the front cover” (Page A-36)

1

Getting Started



z�Operation of the indicator lightDetails on operations of the indicator light are shown below.

1 2 3

4 5

1 PWR/ERRIndicates the power supplying status to the sensor and the error status of the sensor.

yGreen (ON) ...... Operating. yGreen (Blink) .... Setting processing. Operation

is stopped. Blinks once a second.

yRed (ON) .......... Unrecoverable error has occurred.

yRed (Blink) ....... Recoverable error has occurred.

y (OFF) ............... Power is not supplied. Adjusting the focusing position (manual focus only).

For countermeasures when an error occurred, refer to “Error Messages” (Page A-19).

2 OUTIndicates the comprehensive result.

yGreen ............... Comprehensive result is "OK". yRed .................. Comprehensive result is "NG". y (OFF) ............... Setting processing.

Standby status until the first judge finishes after starting the operation or after switching the program number.

yOrange (Blink) ... Indicates the focusing status while adjusting the focusing position with the blinking speed (manual focus type only).

“Focus adjustment for the manual focusing type” (Page 4-14)

3 TRIGGreen light lights up (one-shot) according to input of the internal or external trigger.

4 STATUSIndicates the connecting status to the PC.

yGreen (ON) ...... Normally connected with PC. yGreen (Blink) .... IP address has been retrieved

but the sensor is not correctly connected with PC.

y (OFF) ............... IP address is not assigned. Not correctly connecting with PC.

yOrange (Blink) .. Indicates the focusing status while adjusting the focusing position with the blinking speed (manual focus type only).

“Focus adjustment for the manual focusing type” (Page 4-14)

Normal connection with the PC is not possible, refer to “Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor” (Page A-25).

5 LINK/ACTIndicates the linking status within PC or Ethernet switch.

yGreen (ON) ...... Normally linked. yGreen (Blink) .... Normally linked, and the data

is sending/receiving. y (OFF) ............... Sensor is not normally linked.

1

Getting Started


This chapter explains how to mount the sensor, how to set up the PC, and how to connect the cables.

Mounting the Sensor .........................................2-2Cables .................................................................2-8Setting up the PC .............................................2-14

2

Installation and Connection

2



Mounting the Sensor

yGround (functional ground) the drain cable (FG) of the power I/O cable. yMount and insulate the sensor. Use the attached mounting adapter to insulate. Sensor case has been grounded. If the sensor is not insulated, the electric potential and noises may cause a damage or malfunction. yDo not place the sensor in the environment that exceeds the limit of sensor's resistance to the environment, or environment that propagates the vibration directly to the sensor. Those may cause a damage or malfunction.

yManual focus type needs to adjust the focusing position after installed. Reserve the enough space to adjust and install it. yAt the time of installation, it is better to enable the position or direction adjustment of the sensor by installing the adjustment system at the sensor mounting area. yView and optical axis have individual differences. Adjust the position by checking the actual image at the time of installation. yPlace the sensor where no ambient light has effect. Ambient light includes solar light, lights of other devices, and photoelectric sensors. Also, be careful when the light intensity of the ambient light changes. Use the shield to protect when the location cannot be changed. yPlace the sensor where no object can block out the internal light or the view of the sensor. yDetection may become unstable due to the lights if multiple sensors are placed nearby each other. Delay the timing of external trigger or use the shield to avoid interference.

Checking the view and installed distance

For IV Series, installed distance between the view and target is different depending on the type of the sensor. Check the type of the sensor to be used and its view, and place it in the proper distance.

View H

View V

Installed distance WD

Indicator light

View V = View H x 0.75(H : V = 4 : 3)

The indicator light of the sensor side is the front surface of an image.

Mounting the Sensor

2



Mounting the Sensor

zz Standard range type (color/monochrome)

View H (mm)

Inst

alle

d di

stan

ce W

D (m

m)

10050

0

200150

300

400

500

600

5025 70 100 150130 200 250210

zz Short range type

50

0

100

150

10 20 30 4012 36

View H (mm)

Inst

alle

d di

stan

ce W

D (m

m)

zz Long range type

View H (mm)

Inst

alle

d di

stan

ce W

D (m

m)

500300

0

1500

1000

2000

2500

10045 200 300 400

The value of View H and V will be a half of the value on the figures above when using the digital zooming function (monochrome type only).

2



Mounting the Sensor

Mounting the sensor

Mounting the mounting adapterUse the mounting adapter (accessory or OP-87460) to mount the sensor.

The mounting adapter is mounted with the sensors in the default factory setting. Remove it from the sensor.

“Unmounting the sensor” (Page 2-5)

z�Mounting on the wall yScrew : M3 x 4Use the commercially available screws which have head thickness of 3 mm or lower. yTightening torque : 1.0 N·m or lower

z�Mounting from the jig side yScrew : M4 x 4Use the commercially available screws. yTightening torque : 1.5 N·m or lower

For details on mounting hole dimensions, refer to “Dimensions” (Page 9-5).

Mounting the sensor onto the mounting adapter

1 Mount the sensor to the left and right stopper on the mounting adapter.Sensors cannot be mounted on the side with the indicator light.

Push the sensor to the stopper of the fixing screw

Push until you hear the clicking sound from the both side stoppers

Indicator light

2 Fix the mounting adapter and sensor using the attached screws.

yScrew : M3 x 1 Use the attached screws. yTightening torque : 0.45 to 0.55 N·m

Remove the protection sheet

2



Mounting the Sensor

Unmounting the sensor

1 Dismount the screw.

2 Pull out the stopper of the mounting adapter and unmount the sensor.

Pull out the stopper

2



Mounting the Sensor

Mounting the attachment

Using the dome attachmentDome attachment can be used for the standard range type and short range type sensor.

yDo not remove the front cover of the sensor. yUse the dome attachment at a correct installation distance. Failure to do so may lose the effect of the dome attachment. yAdjust the brightness with the dome attachment mounted.

“Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11) yFor the color type, adjust the white balance with the dome attachment mounted.

“White Balance (for color type only)” (Page 6-42)

z�Mounting the dome attachment

1 Mount the attachment by aligning the concave part of the dome attachment with the mounting screw of the front cover of the sensor.

Concave part

Front cover mounting screw Concave part

Screw hole for mounting the attachment

2 Fix the dome attachment with attached dedicated screws.

yScrew : Dedicated screw x 2 Use the attached dedicated screws. yTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 N·m

z� Installed distance of the dome attachment62 to 112 mm from the front face of the sensor(0 to 50 mm from the front face of the dome attachment)

Target

Installed distance from the front face of the sensor

(0 to

50

mm

) 62 to

112

mm

Sensor type yStandard range type yShort range type

2



Mounting the Sensor

Using the polarizing filter attachment

yDo not remove the front cover of the sensor. yThere are the polarized visible light filter attachment (OP-87436) and the infrared polarization filter attachment (OP-87437). Use the correct polarization filter attachment in accordance with the illuminant of the sensor light. Failure to do so may lose the effect. yAdjust brightness with the polarization filter attachment mounted.

“Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11) yFor the color type, adjust the white balance with the polarization filter attachment mounted.


1 Mount the attachment by aligning the concave part of the polarizing filter attachment with the mounting screw of the front cover of the sensor.

Concave part

Concave part

Front cover mounting screw

Screw hole for mounting the attachment

2 Fix the polarizing filter attachment with the attached dedicated screws.

yScrew : M2.5 x 2 Use the attached dedicated screws. yTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 N·m

Remove the protection sheet (blue)

2



Cables

Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor

1 Adjust the pins of the connector for the power I/O cable and pin connection of the cable connector, and connect the cable to the sensor.

Adjust the pins and the pin connection

2 Tighten the connector by turning the screw-on connector in the clockwise direction.Tightening torque of the screws needs to be 1.0 to 1.5 N·m.

When connecting the connector, insert it without tipping and tighten it well. If the tightening is weak, vibration can loosen the connector and cause bad connections. Also, the enclosure rating may not be maintained with loose connection.* Indication is retighten approximately

90° to 120° with tools such as pliers after tightening with hands.

3 Wire each cable according to its intended purpose.

zz Selecting NPN outputWhen NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-9)

DC24V

IN

OUT

(NPN)

Black/White/Gray/Orange(OUT)

Brown (DC24V)

yBlack (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4) yPink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) / Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)

Use it by assigning the optional function to OUT1 to OUT4 and IN2 to IN6.

External device

Load

Blue (0V)

Drain wire (FG)

Pink/Yellow/ Light Blue/Purple/Green/Red(IN)

zz Selecting PNP outputWhen the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-9)

DC24V

IN

OUT

(PNP)

Black/White/Gray/Orange(OUT)

Brown (DC24V)

yBlack (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4) yPink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) / Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)

Use it by assigning the optional function to OUT1 to OUT4 and IN2 to IN6.

External device

LoadBlue (0V)

Drain wire (FG)

Pink/Yellow/ Light Blue/Purple/Green/Red(IN)

Cables

2



Cables

Wiring color Name Assigning

default value Description

Brown DC24V - + side of power

Blue 0V - - side of powerGND of input-output cable

Black OUT1 Total Status (N.O.)Output assignable function

yTotal Status yTot. StatusNG yRUN yBUSY yError yPos. Adj. y Judge result of each tool (Tool 1 to Tool 16) y Logical operation result of each tool (Tool 1 to Tool 4) yOFF (not used)

White OUT2 BUSY (N.O.)

Gray OUT3 Error (N.O.)

Orange OUT4 OFF

Pink IN1 Ext. Trigger Rising Set external trigger.Rising timing (↑) or falling timing (↓) can be set.

Yellow IN2 OFFInput assignable function

yProgram bit0 to bit4 yClear Error yExt. Master Save yOFF (not used)

Light Blue IN3 OFF

Purple IN4 OFF

Green IN5 OFF

Red IN6 OFF

Drain FG - Insulated frame

Cable specification yBrown/Blue/Black/White/Gray/Orange : AWG25 yPink/Yellow/Light Blue/Purple/Green/Red : AWG28 yWith braided shield cable (with drain cable)

yThe output cable assignment can be changed. “4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)

yN.O./N.C. can be changed. “Output Settings” (Page 6-27)

yThe input cable assignment can be changed. “Input Settings” (Page 6-26)

y Individually insulate the non-used input-output cables. yFor input cables of this sensor, connect with non-contact output (transistor output/SSR output). For contact output (relay output), incorrect input may be operated due to the contact bouncing.

2



Cables

Specification of the circuit and current of the sensor

Input circuit

z� No-voltage input (When the NPN output is selected)When the NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-9), the circuit becomes no-voltage input circuit.External power supply is not necessary.

yON voltage : 2 V or lower yOFF current : 0.1 mA or lower yON current : 2 mA (short circuit)

+3.3V

DC24V

IN1 - IN6

0V

Brown

*

Blue

Main circuit

* Pink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) / Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)

Use by assigning the optional functions to IN2 to 6

z� Voltage input (When the PNP output is selected)When the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-9), the circuit becomes voltage input circuit.

y Input maximum rating : 26.4 V yON voltage : 15 V or higher yON current : 2 mA (for 24V) yOFF current : 0.2 mA or lower

DC24V

IN1 - IN6

0V

Brown

*

Blue

Main circuit

* Pink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) / Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)

Use by assigning the optional functions to IN2 to 6

Output circuit

z�When the NPN output is selectedWhen the NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-9), the circuit becomes open collector NPN output circuit.

yMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA yRemaining voltage : 1.5 V or lower

DC24V

OUT1 - OUT4

0V

Brown

*

Blue

Main circuit

Overcurrent protection circuit

Load

* Black (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4)

Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1 to OUT4

z�When the PNP output is selectedWhen the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-9), the circuit becomes open collector PNP output circuit.

yMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA yRemaining voltage : 2 V or lower

DC24V

OUT1 - OUT4

0V

Brown

*

Blue

Main circuit

Overcurrent protection circuit

Load

* Black (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4)

Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1 to OUT4

2



Cables

Connecting the sensor and the PC

Connecting directly Connects the sensor and PC using the Ethernet cable.


For details on connecting the Ethernet cable, refer to “Connecting the Ethernet cable” (Page 2-12).

Connecting via networkConnects the Ethernet cable to the sensor.Connect the other side of the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet switch.Connect the PC and Ethernet switch using the commercially available network cable.


Ethernet switch

For details on connecting the Ethernet cable, refer to “Connecting the Ethernet cable” (Page 2-12).

The sensor does not support PoE (Power over Ethernet). Supply power using the power I/O cable.

2



Cables

Connecting the Ethernet cableThis section explains how to connect the Ethernet cable.

1 Align the pin connection parts of the Ethernet cable connector with three pins of the cable connector, and connect the cable to the sensor.

Align the pins and the pin connection

2 Tighten the connector by turning the screw-on connector in the clockwise direction. When connecting the connector, insert it without inclination while pushing in and tighten it well.

(1)Tighten the screw-on connector

(2)When the screw stops rotating by the locking mechanism, further tighten it while pushing.

Repeat the steps (1) and (2) and when you cannot tighten the screw by hand any more, use a tool such as pliers for further tightening. Tightening torque, retorque degree, and acceptable spaces between connectors are shown below.

yEthernet cable (OP-87454/OP-87455/OP-87456)Tightening torque : 0.6 N·mRetightening degree : 15 to 30°Spaces between connectors : 1 mm (reference value) yNFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable (OP-87457/OP-87458/OP-87459)Tightening torque : 0.8 to 1.0 N·mRetightening degree : 5 to 10°Spaces between connectors : 0 mm (reference value)

If the connector cable tightening is weak, vibration may loosen the connector and cause bad connections or cable disconnections. Also, the enclosure rating may not be maintained with loose connection.Properly follow the procedures above and tighten the connector completely.

Check the spaces between the Ethernet cable connector and the cable connector.

Spaces between connectors

2



Cables

MEMO

2



Setting up the PC

This section explains how to install/uninstall the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) for IV Software and how to set up the PC.

Required environment for the PC to be connected

To connect the sensor and PC, the environment which satisfies the following conditions is required.Confirm that the PC to be used satisfies the following conditions.

OSOne of the following OS’s must be pre-installed.

yWindows 7 ............. Home Premium/ Professional/Ultimate

yWindows XP ..........Professional/HomeEditionWindows 7 supports for 32bit version/64bit version.Supported languages : Japanese/English

HardwareInterfaceMust be equipped with Ethernet (100 BASE-TX).

Processor yWindows 7 ............. Needs to be compliant with

system requirements for OS. yWindows XP .......... Pentium III or better

Clock speed 1 GHz or fasterMemory capacity

yWindows 7 ............. Needs to be compliant with system requirements for OS.

yWindows XP .......... 512 MB or more (1GB or more is recommended)

Monitor yResolution : 1024 × 768 pixel or higher yDisplay color : High Color (16bit) or higher

HDD free space required for installation1 GB or more

Operating conditions.NET Framework 2.0 Service Pack 2 or later must have been installed.* If this software has not been installed, it will

be automatically installed at the time of IV-H1 installation.

Installing the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)This section describes the procedure for installing the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) for IV Software on the PC.

yThis section describes the installation using an installation example for Windows 7. yExit or finish all other running software before the installation. y Log on with a user who has administrative privileges. y If the user account control screen appears during the installation, click the [Continue] button. y If you have logged on with a user account that does not have administrative privileges, input a user account with administrative privileges and the password.

1 Turn ON the power of the PC and start Windows.

2 Insert the IV-H1 disc into the media drive.The installation program activates by the auto run function of the PC, and the InstallShield Wizard screen opens.If the installation program does not activate, open the media drive from the Computer and double-click "setup.exe".

3 Follow the instructions in the window.

4 After the completion window for InstallShield Wizard is displayed, click the [Finish] button.

5 Remove the installation CD.

Setting up the PC

2



Setting up the PC

Installation destination of the software (reference)

Installation destination of the application software and the PDF User's Manual (default settings) are as follows.

C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\IV-NavigatorWindows 7 64bit version :C:\Program Files (x86)\KEYENCE\IV-Navigator

Application y IV-Navigator.exe : IV-Navigator

Manual y IV_Manual_xx.pdf : IV Series User's Manual

(PC Software)

Data saving destination yWindows 7Document for the logon user \IV-Navigator yWindows XPMy Document for the logon user \IV-Navigator

Deleting the software (uninstall)This section describes the procedure for uninstalling the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) for IV Software.

yThis section explains the uninstallation using an uninstallation example for Windows 7. y If the user account control screen appears during the installation in the Windows 7 environment, click the [Continue] button. y Log on with a user who has administrative privileges.

1 Turn ON the power of the PC and start Windows.

2 Select [Control Panel] - [Programs and Features] from the [Start] menu.

3 Select [IV-Navigator] and click [Uninstall].

4 After the confirmation dialog is displayed, click the [Yes] button.When the IV-Navigator is removed from the Programs and Features screen, uninstallation is completed.

2



Setting up the PC

Changing the PC settings (IP address setting)

y Log on with a user who has administrative privileges. yAuto acquisition of IP address (DHCP server) cannot be used due to the inability to connect with the sensor.

For Windows 7

1 Open the Control Panel.

2 Click ([Network and Internet]) - [Network and Sharing Center].

3 Click [Change adapter settings] on the upper left on the screen.

4 Right-click the [Local Area Connection] icon and select [Properties] from the displayed menu.

5 Select [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] and click the [Properties] button.

6 Select [Use the following IP address] and input the IP address and Subnet mask.

y IP address : 192.168.10.1 ySubnet mask : 255.255.255.0

For direct connection, set an arbitrary IP address (The above is an example). To connect with the existing network, input the IP address that was assigned by the network administrator.

7 After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button and close all the windows.

For Windows XP

1 Open the Control Panel.

2 Double-click [Network Connections].

3 Right-click the [Local Area Connection] icon and select [Properties] from the displayed menu.

4 Select [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] and click the [Properties] button.

5 Select [Use the following IP address] and input the IP address and subnet mask.

y IP address : 192.168.10.1 ySubnet mask : 255.255.255.0

For direct connection, set an arbitrary IP address (The above is an example). To connect with the existing network, input the IP address that was assigned by the network administrator.

6 After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button and close all the windows.

2



This chapter explains the overview of the IV-Navigator screen and operation of IV Series, basic operation flow, and the operation when turning on the power for the first time.Also, explains how to reset the sensor to the default factory setting.

Overview of Screen and Operation ..................3-2Basic Operation Flow ........................................3-4Operation when the Power is Turned on .........3-5Resetting to the Factory Default Settings .....3-10Basic Operation for Tools ...............................3-11

3

Basic Operation

3

Basic O

peration


Overview of Screen and Operation

Indicates each screen of the IV-Navigator and overview of the operation.For details of what can be set on each screen and its operations, see to the applicable references.


Main screen in [Run]Images and judges based on the judgment condition.

“Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]” (Page 5-3)

Main screen in [Program]Performs the program settings, sensor settings, and reference of the image history.


Program DetailsChecks or initializes the program.

“Things can be performed with the program functions” (Page 6-6)

Activation Menu screenSelect the connection method with the sensor or the IV-simulator. You can also change the display language.

“Operation when the Power is Turned on” (Page 3-5)

A

A

SimulatorThe batch backup file (*.iva) is used to confirm or change the setting contents and confirm the image history.

“Chapter 7 Simulator” (Page 7-1)

3

Basic O

peration



Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup)Sets the program to be used for judgment.

“Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)” (Page 4-1)

Limit AdjustmentAdjusts the judgment threshold.

“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page 5-14)

Tool Auto TuningAutomatically adjusts threshold of tool and extraction conditions of Color Area/Area tool in accordance with OK/NG image.

“Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)” (Page 5-15)

Sensor’s internal image historyOperates the image history in the sensor.

“Sensor’s Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 6-15)

I/O SettingsSets the input/output-related settings for the sensor.

“Setting the Input and Output Information of the Sensor” (Page 6-26)

Advanced Sensor SettingsPerforms the advanced settings for the sensor.

“Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor” (Page 6-30) 3

Basic O

peration


Basic Operation Flow

Installing, connecting, and wiring the sensorMount the sensor, and then connect and wire the cable.Also, installing the IV-Navigator.

“Chapter 2 Installation and Connection” (Page 2-1)“Chapter 2 Installation and Connection” (Page 2-1)

Turning on the powerTurn on the power of the sensor, and then perform the initial start-up setting.

“Operation when the Power is Turned on” (Page 3-5)

Settings NavigatorCreate the program to be used for operation in the Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup).

STEP 1: Setting of image optimizationSet the image optimization for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the image for defining the differences in the high and low-quality-target.Set the trigger option, and adjust the brightness and imaging focus.

“1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)” (Page 4-6)“1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)” (Page 4-6)

STEP 2: Registration of a master imageImage the high-quality-target and register the master image to serve as the reference for judgment.

“2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20)“2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20)

STEP 3: Tool settingSet the tool to judge a target.Place a tool on the master image and set the thresholds for judgment. Up to 16 detection tools and 1 position adjustment tool in one program can be set.

“3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)” (Page 4-28)“3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)” (Page 4-28)

STEP 4: Output assignmentAssign the function to output to each output line (OUT1 to OUT4).

“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)

Starting the operation/adjustmentSwitch the [Program] screen to the [Run] screen, and start the operation. If the setting is inappropriate, adjust the thresholds and tool settings (Tool Auto Tuning).

“Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting” (Page 5-1)“Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting” (Page 5-1)

Basic Operation Flow

3

Basic O

peration


Operation when the Power is Turned on

Operation flow when the power is turned on

Direct Connection/Network Connection

Turn on the power of the sensor

IV-Navigator startup

(1)

Initial startup of the sensor

Sensor Setup

(2)

(3)

Run

(4)

Connection failed(Error message)

(5)

(1) There are two connection methods for connecting the sensor: Direct Connection and Network Connection.

“Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Direct Connection)” (Page 3-6)

“Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Network Connection)” (Page 3-6)

(2) When the power of the sensor is turned on for the first time, set the Polarity.

“Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page 3-9)

(2) The main screen in [Program] opens. Set the activation condition in the Settings Navigator. After the setting is completed, operation begins.


(4) After the second time of starting the sensor, the operation begins when the power is turned on.

“Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting” (Page 5-1)“Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting” (Page 5-1)

(5) If the connection has failed, refer to “Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor” (Page A-25).

The sensor can be independently operated.


3

Basic O

peration



Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Direct Connection)

1 Turn on the power of the sensor.

Turn on the power of the sensor before the [Direct Connection] button is clicked in step 3.

2 Double-click the [IV-Navigator] icon on the desktop.

The Activation Menu screen opens.

3 Click the [Direct Connection] button.

y If the [Language] is clicked, the Select language screen opens. Select the arbitrary language so that the language to be displayed can be switched. y To use the FTP client function or field network, select the [Network Connection] button.

4 Click the [Connect] button.

If multiple network adapters are installed on the PC, select the network adapter.

yWhen the sensor is connected with the PC for the first time, set the polarity of the sensor. Refer to “Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page 3-9). yAfter the second time connecting with the sensor, the main screen in [Run] or [Program] opens.

y If the PC cannot connect with the sensor, refer to “Remedy when direct connection is unavailable” (Page A-25). yFor the direct connection, the IP address is automatically set. y If the PC is directly connected with the sensor when the PROFINET function is being used, the PROFINET function will stop. To use the PROFINET function again, restart the sensor.

Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Network Connection)

Starting the IV-Navigator


Turn on the power of the sensor before the [Network Connection] button is clicked in step 3.



3 Click the [Network Connection] button.

If the [Language] is clicked, the Select language screen opens. Select the arbitrary language so that the displayed language can be switched.

3

Basic O

peration



The Network Connection screen opens.

There are two ways to set the sensor to be connected. For details of procedures, refer to each reference.

zz When the sensor on the network is searched

“Searching for a sensor to be connected” (Page 3-7)

zz When the sensor is specified by the IP address

“Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address” (Page 3-8)

Searching for a sensor to be connectedAutomatically searches for a sensor on the network and connects with it.

yThe search time is about 10 seconds. ySearching range and retrievable number of units are as follows.

ySensor with no IP address (default) : A maximum of 8 units can be retrieved within a range that the BOOTP packet from the sensor reaches (Page A-35). ySensor with IP address : A maximum of 16 units can be retrieved on the local network to which the monitor is connected.


2 Click the [Search Sensor] button.


Searching the sensor begins.

When the searching is finished, the searched result will be displayed.

If the search results are not displayed, refer to “When the connection cannot be established

by searching the sensor” (Page A-27).

3

Basic O

peration



3 Select the sensor to be connected.

zz When connecting to the sensor with no IP addressClick the [Connect] button.

The Network Settings screen opens.

Input the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, and PORT, and then click the [Connect] button.

zz When connecting to the sensor with set IP addressClick the [Connect] button.


Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address

Used when the IP address of the sensor to be connected is defined beforehand.

1 Input the IP address of the sensor to be connected.


2 Click the [Connect] button.


If the monitor cannot connect with the sensor, refer to “When the connection cannot be established by specifying the sensor” (Page A-28).

3

Basic O

peration



Operation for initial startup of the sensor

When the monitor is connected to the sensor in the default setting, the screen to select the polarity (NPN or PNP) opens.After the polarity is selected, set up the sensor in Settings Navigator.For details of the Polarity, refer to “Specification of the circuit and current of the sensor” (Page 2-10)..

1 Select the polarity of the sensor and click the [OK] button.

The main screen in [Program] opens.

2 Click the [Sensor Setup] button and set up the program.

For details of the Settings Navigator, refer to “Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the

Judgment Condition)” (Page 4-1).

3

Basic O

peration


Resetting to the Factory Default Settings

Initializing the sensorInitializes information set in the sensor and uses factory default setting.

yThe following settings will not be initialized. yPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP) (Page 6-28) yNetwork settings (IP Address / Subnet Mask / Default Gateway / PORT (TCP)) (Page 6-32)

yTo initialize the registered programs individually, refer to “Initializing a program” (Page 6-14).

1 Switch the IV-Navigator to the main screen in [Program] and click the [Advanced] button.

The Advanced Sensor Settings screen opens.

2 Select the [Initialize/Update] tab and click the [Initialize Sensor] button.

The confirmation dialog appears.

3 Click the [OK] button.


4 Click the [Yes] button.

Initialization begins. After initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen opens.


The system returns to the Advanced Sensor Settings screen.


3

Basic O

peration


Basic Operation for Tools

Operating the image tool barThis section explains the operation method for image tool bar displayed at the upper part of the image display screen for the IV-Navigator by using an example of the main screen in [Run].

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

Image display screen

(1) [Zoom In] / [Zoom Out] buttonIn each time of clicking the button, magnifies/reduces the displayed image on the image display screen.Displayable zooming rates are as follows.100% / 125% / 150% / 200% / 300% / 500%

If an entire image cannot be displayed, the zooming rate currently displayed will be displayed at the lower right of the screen.

Enlarged area currently displayed

Entire image

(2) [Fit to Window] buttonMakes the display size of the displayed image fit with the window size.

(3) Display MagnificationDisplays the display magnification of the displayed image on the image display screen.

(4) Tool Display OptionsSwitches the display method for the detection tool to be displayed on the image display screen.

“Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7)

(5) [Manual Trigger] / [Trigger ON] buttonDisplayed if the external trigger is being set. Use this button when the external trigger cannot be output. This button is not displayed on the simulator screen.

y [Manual Trigger] buttonDisplayed during the [Run] mode. Outputs the trigger once in each click of the button. y [Trigger ON] buttonDisplayed during the [Program] mode. Switches the continuous trigger to ON/OFF in each click of the button.

(6) [Save Image] buttonIndividually saves the image displayed on the IV-Navigator into the PC. The ivp format file which can be used for master image registration or Tool Auto Tuning will also be saved at the same time.The IV-Navigator’s screen will also be saved at the same time (screenshot).

“Saving images and screens displayed on the IV-Navigator individually” (Page 6-22)

(7) [Show saved image file location] buttonOpens the folder which saves an image when the [Save Image] button is clicked.By clicking the ▼ button and selecting the [Change saved image file location], the saving destination of an image can be changed.

Basic Operation for Tools

3

Basic O

peration



Editing the tool windowThe tool window displayed when the tool is set in the Settings Navigator can be edited to any size or direction.This section explains how to edit the tool window using an example of [Outline] tool.

1 In the tool settings of the Settings Navigator, click the [Add Tool] button and click the [Outline] button.The tool window of an outline tool will be displayed.

Tool window

Window Shape

2 Set the tool window of an outline tool.

zz Selecting the shape of the tool windowOn the screen to set the outline tool, the screen to select the shape of the tool window opens by clicking the [Window Shape] button.The [Rect] or [Circle] can be selected.

Rect Circle

zz Moving the tool windowBy moving the mouse cursor onto the tool window, the mouse cursor changes to . Drag the cursor to move the tool window.

zz Changing the size of the tool windowBy moving the mouse cursor onto either side of the tool window, the mouse cursor changes to or .The height or width of the tool window can be changed by dragging it.

By moving the mouse cursor onto either corner of the tool window except the upper right corner, the mouse cursor changes to . The size of the tool window can be changed by dragging it.

When [Circle] is selected in the window shape settings, the size of the circle can be changed by dragging the outline of the circle.

zz Changing the direction of the tool windowBy dragging the arrow mark on the upper right of the tool window, the direction of the tool window can be changed.Also, the direction can be reset by the [Angle Reset] button.

3

Basic O

peration


This chapter explains the functions and operations of the Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup).

Settings Navigator .............................................4-2Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator .....4-31. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target) ....................................4-62. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment) ...4-203. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets) ..4-284. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line) .............................4-60

4

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

4

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgm

ent Condition)


Settings Navigator

In the Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup), the setting items of the program required for judging the target with the sensor are set in each step. Set the menus by sequentially proceeding the steps using the navigation button.

Navigation button

Menus

Flow in the Settings Navigator

STEP 1 Image Optimization settingsSet the image optimization for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the image for defining the differences in the high and low-quality-target.Set the trigger option, adjust the brightness and imaging focus.

“1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)” (Page 4-6)

STEP 2 Master RegistrationImage the high-quality-target and register the master image to serve as the reference of judgment.

“2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20)

STEP 3 Tool SettingsSet the tool to judge a target. Set the tool onto the master image and set the threshold for judgment. Up to 16 detection tools and 1 position adjustment tool in one program can be set.

“3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)” (Page 4-28)

STEP 4 Output assignmentAssign the function to output to each output line (OUT1 to OUT4).

“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)

Settings Navigator

4


ent Condition)


Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator

Starting the Settings Navigator


2 Start the IV-Navigator. “Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Direct Connection)” (Page 3-6)


When the sensor is in the following condition, the main screen in [Program] opens. Proceed to step 5.

yWhen the power is turned on for the first time y If all programs are not being set y If the sensor is being setting up

3 Click the [Program] button.



IV-Navigator switches to [Program].

5 Click the [Sensor Setup] button.

The startup screen of the Settings Navigator opens.

6 Perform the following operation.

zz When the program which has not been set in step 5 is selectedStart setting [1. Image Optimization].

1. Image Optimization settings


zz When the program which has been set in step 5 is selectedClick the shortcut button for each step to start setting.

Shortcut button






4


ent Condition)



Settings Navigator screen and operation flowThis section explains each setting screen to be displayed in the Settings Navigator and the operation flow.For details of the contents which can set on each setting screen and its operations, refer to the applicable references.

2. Master Registration “2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20)

1. Image Optimization “1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)” (Page 4-6)

3. Tool Settings “3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)” (Page 4-28)

4. Output Assignment “4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)

A

A

A

A

4


ent Condition)



Finishing the Settings NavigatorThis section explains the procedure to finish the Settings Navigator.

Finishing by completing all steps

1 Set all steps in the Settings Navigator.

2 Click the [Complete] button at the lower right of the [Output Assignment] screen.

When the program setting has been changed, the confirmation dialog to save appears.

3 Click the [Yes] button.The settings in the Settings Navigator will be saved into the program, and the system returns to the main screen in [Program].

yBy clicking the [No] button, the confirmation dialog to cancel the settings appears. By clicking the [OK] button, the screen closes without saving the settings. yBy clicking the [Cancel] button, the system returns to the Settings Navigator screen.

Finishing without completing the steps

1 Click the [Exit Setup] button at the lower right of the screen.

zz When the required settings are completedThe confirmation dialog to save appears.

zz When the required settings are not completedThe confirmation dialog to finish appears.

yBy clicking the [OK] button, the confirmation dialog to save appears. yBy clicking the [Cancel] button, the system returns to the Settings Navigator screen.

Required settings are not completed yet. Even if the [OK] button is clicked, the proper operation cannot be performed.

2 Click the [Yes] button.The settings in the Settings Navigator will be saved into the program, and the system returns to the main screen in [Program].

yBy clicking the [No] button, the confirmation dialog to cancel the settings appears. By clicking the [OK] button, the screen closes without saving the settings. yBy clicking the [Cancel] button, the system returns to the Settings Navigator screen.

4


ent Condition)


1. Image Optimization 2. Master Registration 3. Tool Settings 4. Output Assignment

Setting the Image OptimizationIn this section, set the Image Optimization for taking an image of a target. Adjust the image for defining differences in high and low-quality-targets.

zz Trigger OptionsA trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the Trigger Options, set the timing to image a target within the field of view of this device. This device can image a target at any timing and can image continuously.

“Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8) “Checking the view and installed distance” (Page 2-2)“Checking the view and installed distance” (Page 2-2)

zz Brightness AdjustmentThe sensor images a target by receiving the reflected light of the built-in light exposed to a target using the CMOS image sensor.In the Brightness Adjustment, a target can be imaged with an appropriate brightness by automatically adjusting the light intensity and shutter speed according to the shape and surface condition (color, shininess, material).

“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)

zz Focus AdjustmentAdjusts the focus of lens. Adjusts for clearly imaging the shape of a target. Auto focus can adjust the focusing position automatically.

“Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13)

1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)

4


ent Condition)



Main screen for the Image OptimizationExplains the main screen for the Image Optimization.

(6)

(7)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(4)

(5)

(8) (9)

(1) TitleDisplays the program number (Page 6-11) and program name (Page 6-12).

(2) Shortcut buttonDisplays the shortcut button to each step.

(3) [Image type] displayDisplays the image type.

y Live .................. Displays an image taken by the currently imaging sensor.

(4) Image tool barDisplays the tools for operating the image taken by the sensor.

“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-11)

(5) Image by the sensorDisplays an image taken by the sensor.

(6) Settings buttonDisplays the settings to be set in the Image Optimization.

“Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8) “Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3) “Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13) “Extended Functions for the Image Optimization” (Page 4-16)

(7) Edit settings screenDisplays the settings to be edited of the selected item using the settings button in the tab format.

(8) [Next to STEP2] buttonProceeds to "2. Master Registration".


(9) [Exit Setup] buttonExits the Settings Navigator.

“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-5)

Trigger Options Brightness Adjustment Focus Adjustment Extended Functions

4


ent Condition)


Setting the Trigger OptionsA trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the Trigger Options, set the timing to image a target within the field of view of this device. This device can image a target at any timing, and can image continuously.

Settings for the Trigger Options

Items Description Setting range Default value

Trigger Options(Trigger type)

Select the type of the timing to start imaging.

y Internal TriggerStarts imaging continuously within the time interval specified in the trigger interval setting. yExternal TriggerStarts imaging with the external trigger synchronized with the target's motion from a photoelectric sensor or PLC installed outside. The time (trigger delay) between inputting the trigger until imaging starts can be set.

Internal Trigger

Trigger Interval

Set when [Internal Trigger] is selected in the trigger type setting.Set an interval (cycle) to automatically start imaging.

1 to 10,000 ms 50 ms

Trigger Delay

Set when the [External Trigger] is selected in the trigger type setting.Used when the output timing of the sensor for the trigger occurrence and the imaging timing of this device. This device starts imaging after the time set in the trigger delay of the trigger input passes.

0 to 1,000 ms 0 ms



4


ent Condition)


zz Internal trigger

(1)

(2)

(3)

Internal trigger

Imaging/ internal processing

Status output

Trigger interval Trigger interval

(1) The trigger will be input automatically according to the trigger interval settings.(2) Performs the internal processing after the imaging.(3) Outputs the status result.

zz External trigger

(1)

(2)

(3)

External trigger

Imaging/ internal processing

Status output

Trigger delay

(1) Start imaging by inputting the trigger at an arbitrary timing. When the trigger delay interval is set, the imaging start time will be delayed in the specified period.(2) Performs the internal processing after imaging.(3) Outputs the status result.



4


ent Condition)


Setting the Trigger Options

1 Start the Settings Navigator. “Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)

2 Display the main screen for the Image Optimization.

“Settings Navigator screen and operation flow” (Page 4-4)

3 Click the [Trigger Options] button.

The screen to edit the Trigger Options settings opens.

4 Select the trigger type.Select [Internal Trigger] or [External Trigger].

5 Set the trigger interval or trigger delay.

zz When the [Internal Trigger] is selected in step 4Set the trigger interval within the range of 1 to 10,000 ms.

If the internal trigger time is shorter than the processing time (Page 5-37), a trigger error occurs.

“Internal trigger” (Page 8-3) “Error Messages” (Page A-19)

zz When the [External Trigger] is selected in step 4Set the trigger delay within the range of 1 to 1000 ms.



4


ent Condition)


Brightness AdjustmentIn the automatic brightness adjustment, the target can be imaged with an appropriate brightness by automatically adjusting a light intensity, an exposure time, and an imaging mode according to the shape and surface condition (color, shininess, material).

Brightness Adjustment settings


[Automatic Brightness Adjustment]

button

Automatically adjusts the light intensity and shutter speed according to the shape and surface condition (color, shininess, material).

- -

Imaging Mode Select an imaging mode of the sensor.

yNormalThis mode is the basic imaging mode. The target can be imaged with less noise. yHDRSelect to image a target such as a metal which reflects a light and has a high contrast. yHigh GainSelect it to shorten the exposure time and when the imaging environment is in a dark place. Lowers the imaging quality due to high gain.

Normal

Exposure Time Displays a current exposure time. - -

Brightness Sets brightness of an image manually.

Standard range type (color) 1 to 100

20Standard range type (monochrome) 1 to 120

Short range type 1 to 120

Long rang type 1 to 100

[Undo] buttonResets the image taken by the sensor to the state before brightness was adjusted.

- -



4


ent Condition)


Adjusting brightness




3 Click the [Brightness Adjustment] button.

The screen to edit the Brightness Adjustment settings opens.

4 Adjust brightness.

zz When brightness is to be adjusted automaticallyClick the [Automatic Brightness Adjustment] button.When a brightness adjustment is completed, the adjusted image will be displayed for the image taken by the sensor.

zz When brightness is to be adjusted manuallyAdjust brightness by selecting the imaging mode and sliding the slider.Depends on the combination of an imaging mode and a slider position, the image taken by the sensor switches to the adjusted image.The position of the slider can be moved by inputting the values or clicking the [▲]/[▼] button.

yThe result of the brightness adjustment will be displayed in the exposure time. yDuring the automatic brightness adjustment, the sensor automatically images a target by inputting the internal trigger regardless of the Trigger Options settings. yDo not move a target during the automatic brightness adjustment. The focus may not be adjusted correctly.



4


ent Condition)


Focus AdjustmentAdjusts the focusing position for clearly imaging the shape of a target.Adjusting the methods differ depending on the type of the sensor connected (manual focusing type/auto focusing type).

zz Auto focusing typeAdjusts the focusing position manually or automatically.

yFor manual adjustmentAdjust the focus by the slider. yFor automatic adjustmentThe sensor automatically detects the position that can be focused by clicking the [Automatic Focus Adjustment] button. The focusing position can be adjusted by operating the slider after automatically adjusted.When the sensor detects multiple matching positions for the focusing position, the optional positions are marked on the slider. Select the focus position from the detected optional positions.

zz Manual focusing typeTurn the focus adjustment screw using the attached flathead screwdriver to adjust the focusing position.

yPlace a target at the appropriate position. “Mounting the Sensor” (Page 2-2)

yDo not move a target during the focus adjustment. The focus may not be adjusted correctly.

Focus adjustment for the auto focusing type




3 Click the [Focus Adjustment] button.

The screen to edit the Focus Adjustment settings opens.

If the auto focus adjustment position (Page 6-35) is set to [Common], the screen to recommend the re-registration of the master image for other programs opens.

4 Adjust the focusing position.

zz When the focusing position is to be adjusted automaticallyClick the [Automatic Focus Adjustment] button.

When the focus adjustment is completed, the adjusted image will be displayed for the image taken by the sensor.



4


ent Condition)


zz When the focusing position is to be adjusted manuallyAdjust the focusing position by the slider.

zz When multiple focusing positions existWhen there are multiple positions that can be focused, the following screen opens.

By clicking the [OK] button, the focus is adjusted to the closest position to the sensor, and the options of the positions that can be focused are indicated by ( ).To change the focusing position to an optional position, click the options ( ) of the focusing positions.

yDuring the auto adjustment, the sensor automatically images a target by inputting the internal trigger regardless of the Trigger Options settings (Page 4-8). Also, when the continuous lighting (Page 4-19) is set, the sensor images with the flash lighting. yThe auto adjustment searches the positions that can be focused over the entire area regardless of the imaging area settings (Page 4-17).

Focus adjustment for the manual focusing type




3 Click the [Focus Adjustment] button.

4 Image the target.If the target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger.If an external trigger cannot be input, click the

button (Page 3-11) to image the

target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily.

When the button is clicked again,

the imaging with an internal trigger finishes.



4


ent Condition)


5 Turn the focus adjustment screw of the sensor with the attached flathead screwdriver, and adjust the focus until the focus value reaches the peak mark.

Bar gaugePeak mark

The peak mark is displayed on the position where the focus is at the maximum. Turn the focus adjustment screw to make the bar gauge on the peak mark position.By clicking the [Peak Clear] button, the peak mark will be hidden, and the current focusing value will be updated as a maximum value.

When the focus cannot be adjusted by watching the focus indicator on the PC, you can check with the blinking cycle of the STATUS and OUT of the indicator light.

yQuickly blinks ...Focused. ySlowly blinks .... Not focused. Adjusts to the

most blinking position.

STATUS indicator light

OUT indicator light

The focus indicator indicates the positions that can be focused over the entire area regardless of the imaging area settings (Page 4-17).



4


ent Condition)


Extended Functions for the Image OptimizationAdjusts the Image Optimization in the extended functions.

Items of extended functions for the Image Optimization


Imaging Area

Imaging Area

Sets the imaging area (image size of the sensor). When the imaging area is reduced, the shutter speed and judging process become faster.

yEntireSets the field of view of the imaging area for the sensor to the entire area. yPartialEdit a tool window and set an arbitrary area in the sensor's field of view as a imaging area.

Entire

Digital Zoom

Switches digital zoom ON/OFF. Images by magnifying the center field two times. The field of view of horizontal and vertical sides will be a half size.(Monochrome type only)

OFF/ON OFF

[Undo] button

Resets the sensor condition to the condition before the settings were changed.

- -

Color Filters

Applies the color filters if the outline of a certain color cannot be displayed when the image is displayed in monochrome by color type sensor.(Color type only)

Unused / Red / Green / Blue / Cyan / Magenta / Yellow Unused

Lighting

Lighting Select ON/OFF for the built-in light.

yONTurns ON built-in light. yOFFTurns OFF built-in light.

ON

Lighting Mode

Select a lighting mode for the built-in light.

yFlashThe built-in light lights within an exposure time at the time of imaging. yContinuousThe built-in light lights continuously regardless of a specified exposure time when imaging a target.

Flash



4


ent Condition)


Imaging Area




3 Click the [Extended Functions] button.

The screen to edit the extended functions settings opens.

4 Select the [Imaging Area] tab and select a type of the imaging area.

If [Partial] is selected, edit the imaging area.

Imaging area

y If the tool has been set, a rectangular area containing tool windows of all tools which have been set will be displayed as [Active Range]. The imaging area cannot be set smaller than the active range. To narrow down the imaging area, change the placement of the tool windows before adjusting the imaging area. ySet a range including the center of the field of the view when trapezoidal correction (Page 6-40) is to be performed. A region that cannot be exposed is created in the exposure range.

yFor details of editing the tool window, refer to “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-12).

yWhen an imaging area is specified, outside of specified area will be displayed in black.



4


ent Condition)


Digital Zoom (monochrome type only)






4 Select the [Imaging Area] tab and set the digital zoom to OFF/ON.

Color filters (color type only)

This is disabled for the Color Area tool.






4 Select the [Color Filters] tab.The image changes to monochrome. In this example, the outline in red and blue will be undefined.

5 Select the color to apply the color filter.Select the filter of the color or complementary color to be detected (select red here).By applying the color filter of the selected color, the red color becomes brighter and the outline among the blue color will be clarified.

Clarified outline



4


ent Condition)


Lighting






4 Select the [Lighting] tab and set the Lighting and Lighting Mode.

yWhen the lighting mode has been changed, re-register the master image and re-set the tool. Otherwise correct judgment may not be possible. yWhen [Continuous] has been selected, the light goes off for approximately 0.3 ms right before imaging.



4


ent Condition)


Registers a master image to be a reference for judgment.

Main screen for the Master RegistrationThis section explains the main screen for the Master Registration.

(3)

(1)

(2)

(4)

(5)

(8)(7) (9)

(6)

(1) TitleDisplays a program number (Page 6-11) and a program name (Page 6-12).


(3) [Image type] displayDisplays an image type.

yMaster .............. Displays a master image (still image).


yTest .................. Indicates that the IV-Navigator is in the Test mode.



(5) Image by the sensorDisplays an image taken by the sensor. The image type to be displayed will be different depending on the settings screen.

(6) Edit settings screenDisplays the settings for the Master Registration in the tab format.

“Registering the Live image as a master image” (Page 4-21)

“Master registration from the image history in the sensor” (Page 4-22)

“Master registration using the file saved in the PC” (Page 4-23)

“Extended Functions for the Master Registration” (Page 4-25)

(7) [Back] buttonReturns to the settings screen for the Image Optimization.


(8) [Next to STEP3] buttonProceeds to "3. Tool settings".




2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment)


4


ent Condition)


Registering the master image

Registering the Live image as a master image

Registers an image taken by the sensor as a master image.


2 Display the main screen for the Master Registration.


3 Place a target of the high-quality-target to be the reference for judgment on the imaging position.

4 Click the [Register Live image as master] button.

5 Images the target.If the target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger.If an external trigger cannot be input, click the





6 Click the [Register the image] button.

The “The master image has been registered.” message appears.

7 Click the [OK] button.The system returns to the main screen for the Master Registration.

Settings for erasing outline (Page 4-38, Page 4-58) will be initialized. Set the settings again as needed.

Register Live image as master Register image of the image history Register image of the file Extended functions


4


ent Condition)


Master registration from the image history in the sensor

Registers an image of the image history in the memory of the sensor as a master image.

To perform a master image registration from the image history in sensor, the image to be registered as a master image in the image history must be saved.





3 Click the [Register image from image history] button.

The Sensor’s internal image history screen opens.

4 Select the image to be registered as a mater image and click the [OK] button.

Select the image

For details of how to operate the screen, refer to “Loading and confirming the saved images” (Page 6-17).

The confirmation dialog for master image registration appears.

5 Check the displayed image and click the [Registration] button.

If the imaging area of the loaded image is different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an area that has not been imaged is registered, the area will be displayed in black.


6 Click the [OK] button.The new master image is registered, and the system returns to the main screen for the Master Registration.



4


ent Condition)


Master registration using the file saved in the PC

Select the batch backup file (*.iva) or image capture file (*.ivp) stored in the PC, and register as a master image.

ySave the image to be registered as a master image into any PC in advance. yThe files which can be registered as a master image are batch backup files (*.iva) and the image capture files (*.ivp).

“Folder composition and file naming rules” (Page 6-25)

z�When using batch backup files (*.iva)




3 Click the [Register image from file location] button.

The screen to select the file opens.

4 Select [IV Series Image File (*.iva;*.ivp)] or [IV Series Batch Backup File (*.iva)] in the File of type.

IV Series Image File (*.iva;*.ivp) or IV Series Batch Backup File (*.iva)

5 Select a file to be registered as a master image and click the [Open] button.

The Image type selection screen opens.

6 Select an image type and click the [OK] button.Select from the image history or master image saved in the batch backup file (*.iva).

The image list for the selected image type opens.

7 Select an image to be registered as a mater image and click the [OK] button.

Select the image




4


ent Condition)






z�When using image capture files (*.ivp)




3 Click the [Register image from file location] button.

The [Open] screen opens.

4 Select [IV Series Image File (*.iva;*.ivp)] or [IV Series Image Capture File (*.ivp)] in the File of type.

IV Series Image File (*.iva;*.ivp) or IV Series Image Capture File (*.ivp)

5 Select a file to be registered as a master image and click the [Open] button.




4


ent Condition)






Extended Functions for the Master Registration

Items of extended functions for the Master Registration

zz Brightness CorrectionBy setting a reference of brightness to the master image, effect of variation of brightness can be reduced.

yBrightness correction can be set when the master image is registered. yFor the Color Area tool of the color type, brightness correction will be disabled.

Brightness Correction




3 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and click the [Settings] button.

zz For color type



4


ent Condition)


zz For monochrome type

4 Set the tool window to be a reference of brightness correction and click the [OK] button.

Region to be the brightness correction reference

For the region to be a reference of brightness correction, specify the following.

yA region with average medium brightness. A region with strong shininess and reflection and a region with no shininess and reflection may not be corrected properly. yA region with a constant imaging status which does not change such as device parts other than the target’s.

For details of editing the tool window, refer to “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-12).“Editing the tool window” (Page 3-12)..

5 Click the [Test] button.*Screen for the color type

If brightness in the specified region is changed using the masking shield, check that brightness of the entire image is corrected.

6 Click the [Before Corr.]/[After Corr.] and check the operation status before brightness correction and status after brightness correction.

7 Click the [OK] button.The system returns to the settings screen for brightness correction.

yWhen brightness correction is not to be used, click the [Delete] button on the screen in step 3. y Brightness correction corrects brightness of the entire image to make the average brightness in the tool window to be a reference of brightness correction the same as brightness of a master image.



4


ent Condition)


MEMO

4


ent Condition)


In this section, set the tool to judge whether a target is high-quality-target or low-quality-target in the master image.The aspects of a target registered as a master image are set as a high-quality-target. During an operation, the sensor judges whether it is a high-quality-target or low-quality-target by judging the differences in the registered high-quality-target and a target to be examined.Up to 16 detection tools in one program and up to 1 position adjustment tool can be set. Those tools can judge a target at the same time.

Selecting a tool according to its intended purpose

Select a tool according to the purpose of an examination.

PurposesDetection tool to be used

Outline tool Color Area/Area tool

To detect the surface/rear face of parts

� �

To detect the orientation of parts

� -

To detect mixture of parts with different shapes

� -

To detect assembly deficiencies of parts

� �

To detect processing defects of parts

� �

To detect differences in sizes (areas) - �

To detect mixture of different colors - �

Types of tools

zz Outline toolA detection tool to calculate the matching rate for the target to be examined based on the outline information of a registered high-quality-target.Judges whether a target is a high or low-quality-target by setting threshold to the matching rate.

“Outline tool” (Page 4-34)

Tool settingsMaster image Outline extraction processing

Processing and judgment during an operationInternal processing <Judge is OK>

Searches a target which has the outline of same shapes as an outline of a high-quality-target.Outline can be detected even if a target is rotated.

Example when the result was NGNo same shapes exist(Detection of existence)

Different shape(Shape detection)

Different direction(Detection of direction)

The matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100.100 indicates that an outline is completely matched. The matching rate decreases in accordance with the number of non-matched parts.

3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)


4


ent Condition)


zz Color Area/Area toolA tool to calculate the matching rate in the area (number of pixels) of a target to be examined as the basis (100 %) of the area (number of pixels) of a registered high-quality-target. This judges whether a target is a high or low-quality-product by setting the threshold to the matching rate.If the sensor is a color type, the tool will be Color Area tool. The system judges by the area with an arbitrary specified color.If the sensor is a monochrome type, the tool will be the Area tool. The system judges by the area with an arbitrary specified brightness.

“Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-42)Tool settings

Master image

Color extraction process(Color type)Brightness extraction process(Monochrome type)

Processing and judgment during an operationInternal processing <Judge is OK>

Compares the area of a target as defining an area of high-quality-target to 100 %.

Example when the judgment was NGArea is narrow Area is wide

yThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100 (default). 100 indicates that an area is completely matched. The matching rate decreases as the area of a target narrows. yThe setting range of the display range and threshold for matching rate can be changed to 0-200 or 0-999. Also, a target can be judged by setting the threshold to the upper limit.

“Setting the upper limit” (Page 4-48)

zz Position Adjustment toolA tool to correct the differences in position (position gap) of a target to be examined. The position adjustment is used with other detection tools.

“Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-53)

Tool settings

Tool windowPosition adjustment window

Master image

Processing during an operation


Search region of the tool window

Position adjustment process


4


ent Condition)


Main screen for the Tool settingsThis section explains the main screen for the Tool settings.

(3)

(1)

(2)

(4)

(5)

(9)(8) (10)

(6)

(7)

(1) TitleDisplays a program number (Page 6-11) and a program name (Page 6-12).


(3) [Image Type] displayDisplays an image type.

yMaster .............. Displays a master image (still image).


yTest .................. Indicates that the IV-Navigator is in the Test mode.



(5) Master imageDisplays a master image and a tool window. If a search region is set, the tool window which indicates the search region (light blue) will be displayed.By clicking the tool window, the selected tool can be switched.

(6) Tool settings buttonAdds, edits, copies, and deletes the tool.

“Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a tool” (Page 4-31)

(7) Tool listDisplays a list of tools set in the program and a threshold of each tool.

(8) [Back] buttonThe system returns to the Master Registration screen.


(9) [Next to STEP4] buttonProceeds to output assignment.





4


ent Condition)


Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a tool

Adding a toolNewly sets a tool.

1 Click the [Add Tool] button.

y If no tools are set, only the [Add Tool] button can be clicked. y If one or more tools are added in one program, the [Edit], [Copy], or [Delete] buttons can be clicked.

2 Select the tool to be added and click the [OK] button.

The message dialog to add tools appears.

The [ColorArea] tool for the color type and the [Area] tool for the monochrome type will be displayed.


4 Set setting items for each tool. “Outline tool” (Page 4-34) “Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-42) “Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-53)

Editing a toolEdits the settings of a tool which has already been set.

1 Select a tool to edit the settings.

2 Click the [Edit] button.

Tools can also be edited by double-clicking the tool in the tool list.

3 Edit setting items for each tool. “Outline tool” (Page 4-34) “Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-42) “Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-53)


4


ent Condition)


Copying a toolCopies a tool which has been set and pastes it to a same position. This is for the Outline tool and Color Area/Area tool. This section explains using example of the Outline tool.

1 Select a tool to be copied.

Select the copy source tool.

2 Click the [Copy] button.


If 16 tools have been set, tools cannot be copied.


The copied tool window with the selected status will be displayed on the copy source tool window.

Copied tool

Button of the copied tool

A tool number which has not been set will be automatically assigned to the copy destination tool number.

4 Click the [Edit] button and set the copied tool.

“Outline tool” (Page 4-34) “Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-42)

Deleting a toolDeletes an unnecessary tool.

1 Select a tool to be deleted.

2 Click the [Delete] button.


3 Click the [OK] button.The selected tool will be deleted and returns to the main screen for the Tool settings.


4


ent Condition)


MEMO

4


ent Condition)


Outline tool Color Area/Area tool Position Adjustment tool

Outline tool

Setting items for the Outline tool


Edit W

indow

Window Shape

Selects the window shape to specify an area of the target to be detected.

yRectSpecify with rectangle window. The arbitrary size, position, and angle can be specified. yCircleSpecify with circle window. An arbitrary size and position can be specified.

Rect

Angle Reset

When the window shape is set to [Rect], resets the angle of the window.

- -

Search Region

Specifies an area to search the outline of a target. By specifying the smaller area as a search region, the processing time will be shortened.

yEntireSpecifies the entire imaging area as a search region. yPartialSpecifies a search region to an arbitrary size in the imaging area.

Entire(Without position

adjustment)Partial

(With position adjustment)

Fine Tune Outline

Sensitivity

The extraction sensitivity of an outline can be selected according to the target.

yHigh SensitivityExtracts an outline of the image with low contrast. Used when an outline you wish to detect cannot be extracted. yNormal SensitivityExtracts the standard outline. yLow SensitivityReduces the extracted volume of an outline. Reduces the extracted volume of an outline that is necessary to detect.

Normal Sensitivity

Remove Outline

Judges by disabling an unnecessary outline which interrupts the stabilized detection. Specifies by tracing an extracted outline.

yUndoThe previous operation can be cancelled. You can undo back to 20 operations before. yRedoReturns to the state before clicking the [Undo] button. yClearInitializes all the disabling processes. ySizeSelect the size (size of the mouse cursor) for when specifying the unnecessary outlines.

-

Limit A

djustment

MatchAdjusts a threshold (matching rate*) used in an OK/NG judgment.

0 to 100 70

Live Adjustment

Changes to the Test mode, and a threshold can be adjusted to the best threshold while running.

- -

* 100 indicates that outline is completely matched. Matching rate decreases in accordance with number of unmatched parts.


4


ent Condition)


Setting the Outline tool


2 Display the main screen for the Tool settings.


3 Add the Outline tool. “Adding a tool” (Page 4-31)

The main screen for outline tool settings opens.

4 Select the shape of tool window.

Rect Circle

5 Set a search region as needed.

“Setting a search region” (Page 4-37)

6 Set the position, size, and angle of the tool window in accordance with the target.

Set the tool window

yFor details of editing the tool window, refer to “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-12).“Editing the tool window” (Page 3-12)..

yThe window angle can be reset by the [Angle Reset].

7 Set a sensitivity and disable the outline settings as needed.

“Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-37) “Default value” (Page 4-61)

8 Click the [Live Adjustment] button.

The sensor turns to Test mode.



4


ent Condition)


9 Image a high-quality-target and low-quality-target.If the target is to be imaged using the external trigger, input the external trigger.If an external trigger cannot be input, click the

button (Page 3-11) to image the target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily.When the button is clicked again, the imaging with an internal trigger finishes.

10 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection by checking the matching rate.<Setting example>If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the low-quality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to 65 which is an intermediate value between 40 and 90.

Matching rateThreshold

yA target is detected as OK if the matching rate is greater than the threshold, and detected as NG if the matching rate is lower than the threshold. yAccording to the status result of the tool, the display color of the tool changes.

“Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7) yThe threshold can be changed using the slider or the [+]/[-] button. yThe threshold can also be set in [Limit Adjustment] of the main screen in [Program].

“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page 5-14) yFor details of the matching rate, refer to

“Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool” (Page A-5).

11 After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button.The system returns to the main screen for the Outline tool settings.

12 Set a tool name as needed. “Setting a tool name” (Page 4-38)


The system returns to the main screen for the Tool settings.



4


ent Condition)


z� Setting a search regionWhen a range of the search region is to be specified, perform the following procedures.

1 Select [Partial].

The editing screen for a search region opens.

2 Set the tool window indicates the search region.

Search region


yThe search region cannot be rotated.

z� Setting a sensitivityAccording to the target, perform the following procedures when the extraction sensitivity of an outline is selected.

1 Select the extraction sensitivity of the outline from the pull-down menu of the [Sensitivity]

The outline which cannot be extracted

Select [High Sensitivity] in this section.

2 Confirm an outline extracting condition which changes according to the [Sensitivity].

Extracted outline



4


ent Condition)


z� Settings for removing outlinesPerform the following procedures to delete an unnecessary extracted outline in the tool window.

1 Click the [Remove Outline] button.

2 Specify an outline which detection is not needed by dragging with the mouse.The specified outline changes from green to yellow.

The removing outline extraction part (yellow)

Mouse cursor(Eraser)

y The size of mouse cursor for when specifying the unnecessary outlines can be changed in [Size]. y The [Undo] button is applicable up to 20 times.

3 After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button.The system returns to the main screen for the Outline tool settings.

z� Setting a tool nameAn arbitrary name such as a name of target can be set to tools (up to 8 characters).A tool name can be confirmed in the main screen in [Run].

“Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting” (Page 5-1)

1 Input any name into the text box.

If the display language (Page 6-49) is changed, characters might get garbled.



4


ent Condition)


Extended Functions for the Outline tool


Rotation Range

Sets a range of the rotating direction to search an outline of the target.The system judges NG if an angle of the target exceeds its rotation range even if the target is the same shape.

y If the setting of the rotation range is too wide, the acceptable range of variations of angles when a target is placed can be increased. y If the setting of the rotation range is too narrow, the processing time can be shorten. yThis can be used for judging the direction of the target by limiting the rotation range.

0 to ±180°(Unit: ±1°) ±20°

Margin ySelect whether or not to allow the margin for the limited angle set in Rotation Range.

yONThe tool window will search with the range ± few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range. yOFFThe tool window will search only within the set rotation range.

ON

Search Algorithm

The detection mode of the Outline tool can be selected according to the target.

yHigh AccuracyDifferences in outlines can be detected with a high degree of accuracy. yHigh SpeedOutlines can be judged faster than in high accuracy mode.There may be the influence from the background or unnecessary outlines other than the target.

High Accuracy

z� Rotation Range

1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and set a rotation range of the Outline tool.

2 After the setting is completed, click the [Settings] tab.The system returns to the main screen for Outline tool settings.

Outline tool > Extended Functions Color Area/Area tool Position Adjustment tool


4


ent Condition)


z�Margin

1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and select a margin of the Outline tool.

ySelect [ON] when detection is not stable because of the influence of the rotation angle of the target. The tool window will search with the range ± few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range. (The tool window will search ± few degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0°) ySelect [OFF] when you would like to detect the target in accordance with the set rotation angle of the target.

2 After the setting is completed, click the [Settings] tab.The system returns to the main screen for the Outline tool settings.

z� Search Algorithm1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and

select a search algorithm type (High Accuracy/High Speed).

ySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is not stable because of a small difference in the matching rate of a high and low-quality-target. ySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is not stable because of the influence of an unnecessary outline other than the target such as the background. ySelect [High Speed] to shorten the processing time.

2 After the setting is completed, click the [Settings] tab.The system returns to the main screen for the Outline tool settings.


Outline tool > Extended Functions Color Area/Area tool Position Adjustment tool

4


ent Condition)


MEMO

4


ent Condition)


Color Area/Area tool

Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool


Edit W

indow

Window ShapeSelect the window shape to specify an area of the target to be extracted.

yRectSpecifies with the rectangular window. An arbitrary size, position, and angle can be specified. yCircleSpecifies with the circular window. An arbitrary size and position can be specified. yEntireThe entire area (imaging area) of an image displayed in the PC becomes the extraction target.

Rect

Angle ResetWhen the window shape is set to [Rect], resets the angle of the window.

- -

Mask

Add Mask

Adds a rectangular/circular mask region in the tool window frame. Inside the mask region is excluded from an area extraction target.

yRectSpecifies a rectangular mask region or a mask cutting region. An arbitrary size, position, and angle can be specified. yCircleSpecifies a circular mask region or a mask cutting region. An arbitrary size and position can be specified. ySetting countsAdding or cutting the mask can be set up to 20 times.

Rect

Cut Mask

Adds a rectangular/circular cutting region in the mask region. Inside the mask cutting region, the mask is disabled and it becomes the target of the area extraction.

Undo

The previous operation can be cancelled.You can undo back to 20 operations before.

- -

Clear Deletes the mask region which has been set. - -



4


ent Condition)



Color Extraction(For color type)

Sets an extraction range by clicking the color to be extracted in the master image or Live image.

yExtract Area [+]Expands an range of the color to be extracted and expands an extraction area. yExtract Area [-]Contracts a range of the color to be extracted and narrows an extraction area. yUndoThe previous operation can be cancelled. yClearCancels the selection of the extracted color. y to Live ImageThe color range to be extracted can be set on the Live image of the target.

(No extraction)

Brightness Extraction(For monochrome type)

Sets an extraction range by clicking brightness to be extracted in the master image or Live image.

yBrightness RangeSets the upper and the lower limit of brightness in a range within 0 to 255 with the clicked brightness as a reference. yUndoThe previous operation can be cancelled. yClearCancels the selection of the extracted brightness. y to Live ImageA brightness range to be extracted can be set on the Live image of the target.

(No extraction)

Limit A

djustment

MatchAdjusts a threshold (matching rate*) used in the OK/NG judgment.

0 to 100 (when the upper limit setting is OFF) 50

Upper Limit

Sets the upper limit of the threshold.Set when the OK/NG judgment is desired when the target area is larger than the OK area.

yON (checked)Activates the upper limit setting. yOFF (not checked)Deactivates the upper limit setting.

Disable

Scale

When the upper limit of the threshold is ON, select the threshold scale in accordance with the range of the matching rate required for the judgment.

y 0 - 200Sets the upper and the lower limit of a threshold in a range within 0 to 200. y 0 - 999Sets the upper and the lower limit of a threshold in a range within 0 to 999.

0 - 200

Live Adjustment

Changes to the Test mode, and the threshold can be adjusted to the best threshold while running.

- -

* The matching rate is 100 when an area matches perfectly. This becomes smaller with a narrower area and larger with a wider area. If the matching rate exceeds the upper limit of the threshold adjusting range, it will be saturated to the upper limit of the threshold adjusting range.



4


ent Condition)


Setting the Color Area/Area tool


2 Display the main screen for the Tool settings. “Settings Navigator screen and operation flow”

(Page 4-4)

3 Add the Color Area/Area tool. “Adding a tool” (Page 4-31)

The main screen for the Color Area/Area tool settings opens.

4 Select a tool window shape.

Rect Circle

When [Entire] is selected, the tool window will be hidden.

5 Set the position, size, and angle of tool window in accordance with a target.

Set the tool window


6 Perform the mask setting as needed.

“Mask settings” (Page 4-47)

7 Set an area to be the target to extract.

zz For color typeClick the [Setup] button of the color extraction.

The screen to select a color to be extracted opens.Click the color to be the reference of judgment for the area.

Click

The clicked color will be extracted.



4


ent Condition)


y If the areas of color that have not been extracted are clicked repeatedly, the extraction range can be added. yClick the [+] / [-] button of the extraction range, and the range of color to be extracted can be expanded/reduced.

yBy clicking the [to Live Image] button, the range of the color to be extracted can be set with the Live Image of the target. yTo re-extract the color, click the [Clear] button and then click the color to be the reference of judgment again.

After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button.The system returns to the main screen to set the Color Area tool settings.

zz For monochrome typeClick the [Setup] button of the Brightness Extraction.

The screen to select brightness to be extracted opens.Click brightness to be the reference of judgment for the color area.

Click

The clicked brightness will be extracted.

y If the areas of brightness that have not been extracted are clicked repeatedly, the extraction range can be added. yAdjust the slider, and the range of brightness to be extracted can be expanded/reduced.

yBy clicking the [to Live Image] button, the range of brightness to be extracted can be set with the Live Image of the target. yTo re-extract brightness, click the [Clear] button and then click brightness to be the reference of judgment again.

After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button.The system returns to the main screen for the Area tool settings.


The sensor turns to Test mode.



4


ent Condition)


9 Image a high-quality-target and low-quality-target.If the target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger.If an external trigger cannot be input, click the

button (Page 3-11) to image the target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily.When the button is clicked again, the imaging with an internal trigger finishes.

10 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection by checking the matching rate.<Setting example>If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the low-quality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to 65 which is an intermediate value between 40 and 90.


yA target is detected as OK if the matching rate is greater than the threshold, and detected as NG if the matching rate is lower than the threshold. y In accordance with status result of the tool, the display color of the tool changes.

“Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7) yThe threshold can be changed using the slider or with the [+]/[-] button. yThe threshold can also be set in [Limit Adjustment] of the main screen in [Program].


11 Set the upper limit as needed. “Setting the upper limit” (Page 4-48)

12 After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button.The system returns to the main screen for the Color Area/Area tool settings.

13 Set the tool name as needed. “Setting a tool name” (Page 4-38)


The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.



4


ent Condition)


z�Mask settingsPerform the following procedures if a mask region is to be specified in the tool window.

1 Click the [Mask] button.

2 Click the [Add Mask] button.

3 Select the mask shape.

4 Set the position, size, and angle of the mask shape in accordance with the target.

Set the mask shape


5 After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button.The system returns to the screen to set a mask region.

6 Click the [Cut Mask] button to cut a mask region.

7 Select the clip shape.



4


ent Condition)


8 Set the position, size, and angle of the cutting shape in accordance with the target.

Set clip shape

For details of editing the tool window, refer to “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-12)..

9 After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button.The system returns to the main screen for the extended functions settings.

Area not to be masked

Area to be masked

10 Repeat steps 2 to 9 as needed and set the mask region.

11 After the setting is completed, click the [Settings] tab.The system returns to the main screen to set the Color Area/Area tool.

z� Setting the upper limitTo perform the OK/NG judgment when an area of the target is wider than an area of a high-quality-target, perform the following procedures.

1 Place a check mark to the check box of the upper limit.

The slider to set the upper limit and the lower limit of the threshold will be displayed.Select the Settings scale from [0-200] or [0-999] in accordance with the range of the matching rate necessary for judgment.

2 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection by checking the matching rate.

Threshold (lower limit)Threshold (upper limit)

Matching rate

y Judged OK when the matching rate is within a threshold range, and NG when it is outside the range. y In accordance with status result of the tool, the display color of the tool changes.





4


ent Condition)


z� Setting the tool nameAn arbitrary name such as a name of a target can be set to tools (up to 8 characters).The tool name can be confirmed in the main screen in [Run].

“Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting” (Page 5-1)

1 Input any name into the text box.

If the display language (Page 6-49) is changed, characters might be garbled.



4


ent Condition)


Extended Functions of the Color Area/Area tool


Advanced Color Extraction

(For color type only)

Specifies a color to be extracted as HSB (H: Hue, S: Saturation, B: Brightness).

yH (hue)0° to 359°(both starting point and ending point) yS (saturation)0 to 255 yB (brightness)0 to 255

-

to Live Image

A color/brightness range to be extracted can be set on the Live image of the target.

- -

Fixed Reference AreaSelect a condition which the matching rate of the Color Area/Area is 100%.

yDisableMatches the area extracted from the master image as the criteria of a rate of 100%. yEnable: LargeMatches 1/10th of the total sensor view as the criteria of a rate of 100%. yEnable: SmallMatches 1/100th of the total sensor view as the criteria of a rate of 100%.

Disable

Outline tool Color Area/ Area tool > Extended Functions Position Adjustment tool


4


ent Condition)


z� Advanced settings for color extraction (for color type only)

1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and click the [Setup] button of [Advanced Color Extraction].

2 Specify the color or brightness of the extraction target.

When the [to Live Image] button is clicked, the range of the color to be extracted can be set on the Live image of the target.

3 After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button.The system returns to the main screen for the extended functions settings.

4 Click the [Settings] tab.The system returns to the main screen for the Color Area/Area tool settings.

z� Fixed Reference Area

Select [Enable] if the color to be judged in the master image cannot be detected.

The Color Area/Area tools with the fixed reference area set as [Enable] are excluded from a Tool Auto Tuning target.

1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and click the [Setup] button of [Fixed Reference Area].

2 Select a condition which the matching rate of the Color Area/Area tool will be 100%. and click [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the extended functions settings.



4


ent Condition)


3 Extract the color/brightness range to be judge.

zz Extract from the Live imageSelect the [Settings] tab and click [Setup] button of the Color/Brightness Extraction.By clicking the [to Live Image] button, extract the color/brightness range to be judged from “LIVE” image.

The color to be extracted can be specified by using HSB (H:hue, S:saturation, B:brightness) in [Advanced settings for color extraction].

“Advanced settings for color extraction (for color type only)” (Page 4-51)

zz Extract from the master image, and then move the tool windowSelect the [Settings] tab and move the tool window.By clicking the [Setup] button of the Color/Brightness Extraction, extract the color/brightness range to be judged.Click the [OK] button and move the tool window to the position where the color/brightness is to be judged.

Extract the color/brightness

Move

4 After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button.The system returns to the main screen for the Color Area/Area tool settings.



4


ent Condition)


Position Adjustment toolIf there are varies of the position determining of the target, the position to be judged is also declined from the tool window and cannot be judged correctly.The amount that the target is off-centered in regards to the master image will be calculated by the internal sensor and corrected by the position adjustment tool, so the off-centered position can be detected correctly even if the position was off-centered.

Tool window Tool window

Position adjustment window Position adjustment window


Tool settingsMaster image

RunPosition adjustment process

yWhen the Position Adjustment tool is being used, the processing time will be longer. y In the case of the outline tool, the search range position will be adjusted. The outline of a target is searched in adjusted search range and the searched outline will be judged. yUsed when an area of the target to be examined and a relative position of the target are determined and when there is variability in determining the position (position or angle) of a target. For example, intended purposes are shown below.- For package box, whether or not the seal is put in the determined area and direction.- For components, whether logos/symbols/insignias are in-print or not. y If the position adjustment fails, the result of position adjustment is NG. In this case, the total status result is NG. The individually set detection tool will not be judged. Failure of position adjustment can be checked with position adjustment output. Review the position adjustment settings and position determining accuracy for a target.

“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60) yWhen the Position Adjustment tool is added, the following settings for the detection tools have been set will be changed.- Outline tool : When the search region is the entire range, the value will be initialized to the default value in which the position adjustment is enabled.- Color Area/Area tool : When the window shape is the entire range, the value will be initialized to the default value in which the position adjustment is enabled. yOnly one Position Adjustment tool can be set in one program. By setting the position adjustment, the position adjustment will be applied to all detection tools. yFor details of matching rate, refer to “Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool” (Page A-5).



4


ent Condition)


Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool


Edit W

indow

Window Shape

Select a shape of the window to specify the range of a target to be the position adjustment reference.

yRectSpecifies with the rectangular window. An arbitrary size, position, and angle can be specified. yCircleSpecifies with the circular window. An arbitrary size and position can be specified.

Rect

Angle Reset

When the window shape is set to [Rect], resets the angle of the window.

- -

Search Region

Specifies a area to search a target to be a reference of position adjustment. By specifying the narrower area as a search region, the processing time will be shortened.

yEntireSpecifies entire imaging area as a search region. yPartialSpecifies a search region to an arbitrary size in the imaging area.

Entire

Fine Tune Outline

SensitivityThe extraction sensitivity of an outline can be selected according to a target.

yHigh SensitivityExtracts an outline of the image with low contrast. Used when an outline you wish to detect cannot be extracted. yNormal SensitivityExtracts the standard outline. yLow SensitivityReduces the extracted volume of an outline. Reduces the extracted volume of an outline that not necessary to detect.

Normal Sensitivity

Remove Outline

Unnecessary outlines which obstruct the steady position adjustments can be disabled. Specifies by tracing the extracted outline.

yUndoThe previous operation can be cancelled. You can undo back to 20 operations before. yRedoReturns to the state before clicking the [Undo] button. yClearInitializes all the disabling processes. ySizeSelect the size (size of the mouse cursor) for when specifying the unnecessary outlines.

Not specified

Limit A

djustment

Match

Adjusts a threshold (matching rate*) which judges whether or not the position adjustment is succeeded.

0 to 100 70

Live Adjustment

Changes to the Test mode, and the threshold can be adjusted to the best threshold while running.

- -

* 100 indicates that an outline is completely matched. Matching rate decreases in accordance with number of non-matched parts.



4


ent Condition)


Setting the position adjustment tool


2 Display the main screen for the Tool settings.


3 Add the Position Adjustment tool. “Adding a tool” (Page 4-31)

The main screen for the Position Adjustment tool settings opens.

4 Select the tool window shape.

Rect Circle

5 Set a search region as needed.

“Setting a search region” (Page 4-57)

6 Set the position, size, and angle of tool window in accordance with a target.

Set the tool window

Set the position and size of tool window as large as possible by selecting the part that is dissimilar in shape.

“Stabilizing the position adjustment” (Page 5-34)


7 Set the sensitivity and disable outline settings as needed.

“Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-37) “Settings for removing outlines” (Page 4-38)



4


ent Condition)



The sensor turns to the Test mode.

9 Image a target.If the target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger.If an external trigger cannot be input, click the





10 Adjust a threshold to judge whether or not the position adjustment is succeeded by checking the matching rate.


y If there are many variation of target shapes that a tool window has been set to, set the threshold to a lower matching rate. yA target is detected as OK if the matching rate is greater than the threshold, and detected as NG if the matching rate is lower than the threshold. y In accordance with status result of the tool, the display color of the tool changes.



11 After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button.The system returns to the main screen for the Position Adjustment tool settings.


The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.



4


ent Condition)


z� Setting a search regionTo limit a range (adjusting range of position adjustment) to search a target to be a reference, set it in the search region settings. When a range of the search region is to be specified, perform the following procedures.

1 Select [Partial].

The editing screen for a search region opens.

2 Set the tool window indicates a search region of the tool window.

Search region


yThe search region cannot be rotated.

z� Setting a sensitivityAccording to the target, perform the following procedures when the extraction sensitivity of an outline is selected.

1 Select the extraction sensitivity of an outline from the pull-down menu of the [Sensitivity]

The outline which cannot be extracted

Select [High Sensitivity] in this section.

2 Confirm an outline extracting condition which changes in accordance with the [Sensitivity].

Extracted outline



4


ent Condition)


z� Settings for disabling outlinesPerform the following procedures to delete an unnecessary extracted outline in the tool window.

1 Click the [Remove Outline] button.

2 Specify an unnecessary outline in the basic shape of position adjustment by dragging with the mouse.The specified outline changes from green to yellow.

The outline that the outline extraction has disabled (yellow)

Mouse cursor (Eraser)

yThe size of mouse cursor for when specifying the unnecessary outlines can be changed in [Size]. yThe [Undo] button is applicable up to 20 times.

3 After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button.The system returns to the main screen for the Position Adjustment tool settings.



4


ent Condition)


Extended Functions for the Position Adjustment tool


Rotation Range

Sets a range to adjust the position to the rotating direction.The status result of position adjustment is NG without adjusting the position if an angle of a target exceeds its rotation range.

y If the setting of rotation range is too wide, the acceptable range of variation in angles when a target is placed. y If the setting of rotation range is too narrow, the processing time can be shorten.

0 to ±180°(Unit: ±1°) ±20°

Margin Select whether or not to allow the margin for the limited angle set in Rotation Range.

yONThe tool window will search with the range ± few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range. yOFFThe tool window will search only within the set rotation range.

ON

z� Rotation Range1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and

set the rotation range of the Position Adjustment tool.

2 After the setting is completed, click the [Settings] tab.The system returns to the main screen for the Position Adjustment tool settings.

z�Margin1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and set

the margin of the Position Adjustment tool.

y Select [ON] when the position adjustment is not stable because of the influence of the rotation angle of the target.The tool window will search with the range ± few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range.(The tool window will search ± few degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0°.)

y Select [OFF] when you would like to detect the target in accordance with the set rotation angle of the target.

2 After the setting is completed, click the [Settings] tab.The system returns to the main screen for the Position Adjustment tool settings.


Outline tool Color Area/Area tool Position Adjustment tool > Extended Functions

4


ent Condition)


Set the output items to be assigned to the output line (OUT1 to OUT4). “Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor” (Page 2-8)“Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor” (Page 2-8) “Chapter 8 Controlling with Input/Output Line” (Page 8-1)“Chapter 8 Controlling with Input/Output Line” (Page 8-1)

Main screen for the Output Assignment

(3)

(1)

(2)

(4)

(5)

(9)(8)

(7)

(6)




yMaster .............. Displays the master image (still image).



(5) Master imageDisplays the master image.

(6) Tool settings button y [Output Assignment] tabAssigns the output item to each output line.

“Setting the Output Assignment” (Page 4-61) y [Extended Functions] tabSets the total status conditions and logics.

“Setting the Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-63) “Setting Logics” (Page 4-64)

(7) [Valid]/[Invalid] setting for the trigger error outputSelect whether to enable/disable the output when the trigger error occurred.

“Error Messages” (Page A-19)

(8) [Back] buttonReturns to the Tool settings screen.


(9) [Complete] buttonFinishes the Settings Navigator.


4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)


4


ent Condition)


Setting range of the Output Assignment

Setting range Description

OFF Do not output.Output function will be constantly OFF.

Total Status

When the total status result of the tools which have been set was OK, the output function turns ON.The condition of the total status can be selected from [All Tools OK] / [Any Tool OK] / [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].

Tot.StatusNG

When the total status result was NG, the output function turns ON.

RUNWhen the sensor is running with no system error occurred, the output function turns ON.

BUSY

The output function turns ON when the system is in a state that cannot input additional trigger; such as during imaging, judging processing, switching programs, and registering external master images.

Error

The output function turns ON when an error is occurred; such as system error, memory read out error for start-up, external master registration error, and trigger error (when the trigger settings are enabled).

Position Adjustment

When position adjustment processing is finished normally, the output function turns ON.

Tool 01 to 16

When the status result of specified tool is OK, the output function turns ON. Status results can be output by each tool.

Logic 1 to 4 When the status result of specified logic is OK, the output function turns ON.

z� Default valueOUT1 : Total Status (N.O.)OUT2 : BUSY (N.O.)OUT3 : Error (N.C.)OUT4 : OFFTrigger Error : OFF

yN.O./N.C. can be changed. “Output Settings” (Page 6-27)

yThe input cable assignment can be changed. “Input Settings” (Page 6-26)

Setting the Output Assignment


2 Display the main screen for the Output Assignment.


3 Click the item name of output line to perform output assignment and select the output item.

4 Finishes the Settings Navigator. “Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-5)


Output Assignment Extended Functions

4


ent Condition)


Extended functions for the Output Assignment

Extended functions items for the Output Assignment


Total Status Conditions

Selects a condition for the total status result. The total status result is displayed in accordance with the selected condition.

yAll Tools OKWhen all of the status results of the detection tools was OK, the total status output function turns ON. yAny Tools OKWhen any of the status results of the detection tools was OK, the total status output function turns ON. y Logic 1 to 4When the status result of the set logic was OK, the total status output function turns ON.

All Tools OK

Logic Settings

Assigns the logical operation results of each detection tool to the output function.Up to 4 items, Logic 1 to 4, can be defined.

yUnused The selected items are not used in a logical formula. yUsed When the status results of the selected items were OK, the total status output function turns ON. yUsed (Inverse) When the status results of the selected items were NG, the total status output function turns ON.

Unused

Logic Selects the logical operation method of logics.

yANDCalculates the logical multiply (AND) of all selected items. yORCalculates the logical sum (OR) of all selected items.

AND



4


ent Condition)


Setting the Total Status Conditions

1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and select a total status condition.

The total status result is displayed in accordance with the selected condition.

zz All Tools OKWhen all of the detection tools were OK, the total status output function turns ON.

Image of total status output when the total status condition is [All Tools OK]

OKTool A

Tool B

Total Status

OK

OK

NG

NG

NG

zz Any Tools OKWhen any of the detection tools was OK, the total status output function turns ON.

Image of total status output when the total status condition is [Any Tools OK]

OKTool A

Tool B

Total Status

OK

OK

NG

NG

NG

For [Any Tools OK], the status result of the position adjustment is not included in the total status conditions.

zz Logic 1 to 4When the status result of the defined logic was OK, the total status output function turns ON.

Image of total status output when the total status condition is [Logic 1 to 4]

Logic 1 to 4

Total Status

OK

OK

NG

NG

yWhen the position adjustment failed, the status result of each tool is NG. y If the Area tool window is protruded from the imaging area when position adjustment succeeded, the tool cannot be judged and the status result is NG.

2 When the setting is completed, click the [Output Assignment] tab.The system returns to the main screen for the Output Assignment settings.



4


ent Condition)


Setting Logics

1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and select a total status condition.

2 Click the number which the logic judgement condition is to be defined.

Each Logic Settings screen appears.

When an undefined detection tool has been defined to a logic, [An undefined tool is selected.] is displayed on the right side of the logic number.

3 Select the logical operation method of the logic.

yWhen [AND] has been selected, the logic output is the logical multiply (AND) of the status results of each selected item. yWhen [OR] has been selected, the logic output is the logical sum (OR) of the status results of each selected item.

4 Select items to be integrated into the logic.The status result of the logic is calculated from OK/NG of all of the items which [Used] or [Used (Inverse)] has been set.

zz Logic : AND

Image of logic output when the Logic is [AND]

Tool A

Logic 1 to 4Tool BTool C

(Inverse)

Tool A Tool B Tool C Logic

OK OK OK NG

NG OK OK NG

OK NG OK NG

NG NG OK NG

OK OK NG OK

NG OK NG NG

OK NG NG NG

NG NG NG NG



4


ent Condition)


zz Logic : OR

Image of logic output when the Logic is [OR]

Tool A

Logic 1 to 4Tool BTool C

(Inverse)

Tool A Tool B Tool C Logic

OK OK OK OK

NG OK OK OK

OK NG OK OK

NG NG OK NG

OK OK NG OK

NG OK NG OK

OK NG NG OK

NG NG NG OK

ySelect either [Unused]/[Used]/[Used (Inverse)] for each item (Position Adjustment/Tool 01 to Tool 16/Logic 1 to Logic 4). yWhen the status results of the [Used] items were OK, the status output function for items in the logic turns ON. yWhen the status results of the [Used (Inverse)] items were NG, the status output function for items in the logic turns ON. yTo define a logic which has been set to another logic, use the logic number which is greater than the logic number which has been set.For example, use either of Logic 2 to Logic 4 in case of defining Logic 1 to another logic.

When the program number has been changed and you went to [Run] from [Program] after the power ON, the judgement is not done if no trigger input. The judgement output of each tool is OFF.

5 When the setting is completed, click the [OK] button.The system returns to the main screen for the Extended Functions settings.

6 Click the [Output Assignment] tab.The system returns to the main screen for the Output Assignment settings.



4


ent Condition)


MEMO

4


ent Condition)


This chapter explains the procedures for starting the operation, the names and functions of each part displayed in [Run] main screen and the adjustment procedures to fully utilize the judgment ability of the IV Series.

Starting an Operation ........................................5-2Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program] ...5-3Names and Functions of the Screen in [Run] / [Program] ...............................................5-4Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment ..............5-14Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition) .........................................................5-15Stabilizing the Judgment Process .................5-29Shortening the Processing Time ...................5-37

5

Operating/Adjusting

5

Operating/A

djusting


Starting an Operation

Starts an operation in accordance with the program created with the Settings Navigator.

The sensor can be independently operated.

Turning on the power and starting an operation

1 Turn on the power of the sensor and boot up IV-Navigator.



2 Confirm that main screen in [Run] opens.

If the image or status result does not update, refer to “Troubleshooting” (Page A-16).

Exiting the sensor settings and starting an operation

1 Exit the settings of the sensor, such as Settings Navigator.

“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-5)“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-5)The main screen in [Program] opens.

2 Click the [Run] button.

The main screen of [Run] appears and starts running.

If the image or status result does not update, refer to “Troubleshooting” (Page A-16).

Starting an Operation

5

Operating/A

djusting


Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]

Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]

Main screen in [Program](Page 5-4)

Main screen in [Run](Page 5-4)

Statistical information displayDisplays statistical information of status results.(Page 5-10)

Tool information displayDisplays the threshold/judgment value by tools and the histogram for status result. (Page 5-12)

Limit AdjustmentAdjusts the threshold for tools. (Page 5-14)

Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup)Sets the program to use for judgment. (Page 4-1)

Tool Auto TuningBased on OK/NG images, automatically adjusts the extraction condition for threshold for tools and the Color Area/Area tool. (Page 5-15)

5

Operating/A

djusting


Names and Functions of the Screen in [Run] / [Program]

Main screen in [Run] / [Program]

(8)

(7)

(14)(13)

(11)(12)

(10)

(15)

(16)

zz Main screen in [Run]

(8)

(7)

(14)

(1)(1) (2)(2) (3)(3) (4)(4) (5)(5) (6)(6)

(17)

(18)

(19)

(20)

zz Main screen in [Program]

(9)(9)

(12)

(1) [Run] / [Program] switch buttonSwitches the main screen in [Run] and [Program].

yBy clicking the [Program] button on the main screen in [Run], the operation stops and switches to the main screen in [Program]. yBy clicking the [Run] button on the main screen in [Program], the setting finishes and switches to the main screen in [Run].

(2) Program informationDisplays the program number (Page 6-11) and program name (Page 6-12).Programs can be switched from the pull-down menu.

(3) [Detail] buttonDisplays the Program Details screen.

“Displaying the Program Details screen” (Page 6-11)

(4) [Image Hist] buttonDisplays the Sensor’s internal image history screen.


(5) [I/O Settings] buttonDisplays the I/O Settings screen.

“Setting the Input and Output Information of the Sensor” (Page 6-26)

(6) [Advanced] buttonDisplays the Advanced Sensor Settings screen.

“Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor” (Page 6-30)

(7) Menu bar “Operating from the menu bar” (Page 6-45)

(8) Status barIn the main screen in [Run], the total status result, trigger type, and processing time are displayed.

y If the total status result is OK, OK will be displayed. The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK]/[Any Tool OK]/[Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. y If the total status result is NG, NG will be displayed. yProcessing time indicates the time from receiving the external or internal trigger until determining the status result. In the case of the One-Shot output (Page 6-27), the ON-Delay Time is not included.

In the main screen in [Program], the image type (Master) and trigger type are displayed.

(9) Image tool barDisplays the tool for operating the image displayed on the IV-Navigator.

“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-11)“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-11)

(10) Tool windowDisplays the selected tool region with a green frame when the status result is OK, and displays with a red frame when the status result is NG.You can also switch the selected tool by clicking the designated region.



5

Operating/A

djusting



(11) Search regionIf the search region of the selected tool is being set to Partial, the search region will be displayed with a light blue frame. If the position adjustment is being set, the search region after position adjustment will be displayed.

(12) Brightness correction regionWhen the brightness correction is being set, the brightness correction region will be displayed with a blue frame.

(13) Statistical information displayDisplays the statistical information of the status result (default value: hidden).

“Displaying the statistical information” (Page 5-10)

(14) Sensor InformationDisplays the model, device name (Page 6-31), connection method ([Direct connection] or [IP address of network connection]) (Page 6-32), and MAC address (Page 6-31) for the sensor.

(15) Status gaugeDisplays the status gauge by tools which have been set.

“Displaying the tool information” (Page 5-12)

(16) Tool information ([Match] tab)Displays the information for the selected tool.

“Displaying the tool information” (Page 5-12)

(17) [Sensor Setup] buttonDisplays the Settings Navigator screen.

“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)

(18) [Limit Adjustment] buttonDisplays the Limit Adjustment screen.


(19) [Inspection Tool Auto Tuning] buttonDisplays the Tool Auto Tuning screen for auto tuning.


(20) Master image displayDisplays the master image registered to the currently selected program. If no master image is registered, [No Master Image] will be displayed.

y "Lock Enabled" will be displayed in the lower right of the main screen in [Run] if the password lock is being set.

Password is required when while switching to the [Program] main screen.

“Security” (Page 6-34) ySearch area and tool window will be hidden when you select [OFF] for display methods for tools (Page 5-7). 5

Operating/A

djusting



Enlarging the image displayThe display magnification of images can be changed.

1 Change the magnification ratio to the desired ratio by clicking the or button.

For details of the image tool bar, refer to “Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-11).“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-11)..

2 Adjust the display position of the enlarged image as needed.

yDrug the image to change the display position enlarged image. y If you click the or button after changing the display position, the image will be enlarged/reduced with reference to the center of the displayed image.

Selecting the tool whose information to be displayed

There are two methods for selecting tools, whose information you wish to display; (1) selecting the tool from the status gauge and (2) clicking the tool region on the image.

z� Selecting the tool from the status gauge

1 Click the tool whose information you wish to display from the status gauge.

Click the tool

Information of the selected tool will be displayed.

Selected tool

Information of the selected tool

z� Selecting the tool by clicking it on the image

Click the tool

Selected tool

Information of the clicked tool will be displayed.

clicked tool

Information of the clicked tool

5

Operating/A

djusting



Selecting a display method for toolsIf you select a tool display method from the tool display pull-down menu, the display method for tools changes in accordance with the selected item.

1 Select the display method from display method pull-down menu in accordance with the intended purpose.

The display method for tools changes in accordance with the selected menu.For details of the tool display methods, refer to

“Display methods for tools” (Page 5-7).

Display methods for toolsDepending on the type of the sensor (color or monochrome type), selectable display methods are different.

z� For color type

zz OFF

The tool windows and search regions of all tools become hidden.

zz Window

Selected tool yDisplays the frame of the tool window with a thick line. If the mask region is set to the Color Area tool, the region that the tool window and mask region are combined will be displayed. yDisplays the frame of the search region in light blue.

Non selected tools yDisplays the frame of the tool window with a thin line. yThe search region and mask region will not be displayed.

CommonWhen the result of position adjustment and the status result of the tool are OK, the tool will be displayed in green. If one of the results is NG, the tool will be displayed in red.Displays the brightness correction window in blue.

5

Operating/A

djusting



zz Process 1

Inside the tool windowOutside the tool window

Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the following are different. The rest are the same.Selected tool

yOutline toolDisplays inside the tool window in monochrome, and outside of the tool window in color. Indicates the recognized outline with a series of points in green (OK) or red (NG).If the brightness correction has been set, inside the tool window is displayed with the corrected brightness. yColor Area toolDisplays the extracted region in green (OK) or red (NG).

zz Process 2

Inside the search region

Outside the search region

Compared to when the [Process 1] is selected, the following are different. The rest are the same.Selected tool

yOutline toolDisplays inside the tool window and search region in monochrome, and outside of the search region in color.If the brightness correction has been set, inside the search region is displayed with the corrected brightness. yColor Area toolDisplays inside the tool window in monochrome. The extracted region is displayed in the color of the target.

z� For monochrome type

zz OFF

The tool windows and search regions of all tools become hidden.

zz Window

Selected tool yDisplays the frame of the tool window with a thick line. If the mask region is set to the Area tool, the region that the tool window and mask region are combined will be displayed. yDisplays the frame of the search region in light blue.

Non selected tools yDisplays the frame of the tool window with a thin line. yThe search region and the mask region will not be displayed.

CommonWhen the result of position adjustment and the status result of the tool are OK, the tool will be displayed in green. If one of the results is NG, the tool will be displayed in red.Displays the brightness correction window in blue.

5

Operating/A

djusting



zz Process

This is selectable for the Area tool and for the Outline tool for which [Brightness Correction] has not been set.Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the following are different. The rest are the same.Selected tool

yOutline toolIndicates the recognized outline with a series of points in green (OK) or red (NG). yArea toolDisplays the extracted region in green (OK) or red (NG).If the brightness correction has been set, inside the tool window will be displayed with the corrected brightness and outside of the tool window will be displayed with brightness before correction.

zz Process 1

Inside the tool windowOutside the tool window

This is selectable for the Outline tool for which [Brightness Correction] has been set.Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the following are different. The rest are the same.Selected toolIndicates the recognized outline with a series of points in green (OK) or red (NG).Displays inside the tool window with the corrected brightness and outside the tool window with brightness before correction.

zz Process 2

Inside the search regionOutside the search region

This is selectable for the Outline tool for which [Brightness Correction] has been set.Compared to when the [Process 1] is selected, the following are different. The rest are the same.Selected toolDisplays inside the search region with brightness corrected and outside of the search region with brightness before correction.

5

Operating/A

djusting



Displaying the statistical informationWhen the [Statistics] button in the [View] menu is selected, the statistical information of judgment is displayed.

Displaying the statistical information

1 Select [View] → [Statistics] on menu bar to place a check mark next to [Statistics].

The statistical information will be displayed.

(1) (2) (3) (4)

Contents of the statistical information are as follows.

(1) OUT informationDisplays the latest status results of items which are assigned to an output line (OUT1 to OUT4) (Page 4-60).

(2) Processing time informationDisplays information related to the processing time.

yTIME ................ Displays the processing time of the last judgment process.

yMAX ................. Displays the maximum value of the processing time.

yMIN .................. Displays the minimum value of the processing time.

yAVE .................. Displays the average value of the processing time.

(3) Trigger count informationDisplays the information related to the number of triggers.

yTrigger No. ....... Displays the total number of triggers issued. This number does not include the number of trigger errors.

yOK .................... Displays the number of triggers issued with the total status OK.

yNG .................... Displays the number of triggers issued with the total status NG.

yTrigErrorNo ...... Displays the number of triggers issued as error triggers.

(4) [Reset Stat.] buttonResets the statistical information and histograms.

yYou can copy the statistical information to clipboard by right-clicking in the statistical information screen. yThe upper limit of Trigger No. is 999999. When the number exceeds the upper limit, the counter resets to 0 and starts counting again. yThe upper limit of OK, NG, and TrigErrorNo is 999999. The values display stops updating when the upper limit is reached. yThe statistical information is reset under the following conditions.- When the [Reset Stat.] button is clicked- When the power of the sensor is turned OFF- When the tool is added/deleted/copied- When the upper limit of the Color Area/Area

tool is enabled/disabled or when the setting scale is changed by the user operation or Tool Auto Tuning

- When the Tool Auto Tuning is started if more than two tools other than the position adjustment tool are being set

- When the program is switched- When each correction of the setup adjustment

is started- When the sensor is initialized

5

Operating/A

djusting



Hiding the statistical information

1 Select [View] → [Statistics] on menu bar to release the check mark.

The statistical information becomes hidden.

5

Operating/A

djusting



Displaying the tool informationYou can display or hide the selected tool information with the [View] menu.

The matching rate histograms are displayed by default.

Displaying the tool information

1 Select [View] → [Tool Data] on menu bar to place a check mark next to [Tool Data].

The tool information will be displayed.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) (6) (7)

Contents of the tool information are as follows.

(1) Status gaugeDisplays the tools set in the program. Tool name, threshold, matching rate for each tool and status result are displayed.Status result OK is displayed in green and NG is displayed in red.

y Judge is OK

y Judge is NGMatching rate and

status result

ThresholdTool Name

For details on the status results, refer to “Displaying and outputting the status result” (Page A-4).

(2) Tool NameDisplays the tool name of the selected tool.

(3) HistogramDisplays the histogram (frequency distribution) of the selected tool.With the threshold being a border, the range for OK is displayed in green and for NG is displayed in red.

yAbscissa axis ... Displays the distribution range of the matching rate. The display range is fixed. It cannot be specified arbitrary.

yVertical axis ...... Adjusted automatically in accordance with the maximum value of the frequency. It cannot be specified arbitrary.

(4) Matching rate of the latest judgment processDisplays the matching rate of the latest judgment process.Click the match bar to move to the limit adjustment (Page 5-14).

(5) ThresholdDisplays the threshold of the selected tool.

5

Operating/A

djusting



(6) Judgment recordDisplays the judgment process counts for OK or NG.

yOK ... Displays the process counts for "OK". yNG ... Displays the process counts for "NG".

If the judgment threshold is changed, the histogram is updated according to the result judged by the changed threshold.However, the counts judged by the previous threshold are displayed in the judgment record. Therefore, the judgment condition on the histogram may be different from the judgment record.

(7) Matching rate information yMAX .......... Displays the maximum value of

the matching rate. yMIN ........... Displays the minimum value of the

matching rate. yAVE ........... Displays the average value of the

matching rate.

yThe upper limit of judgment processing count display for the judgment record is 999999. Update of the value stops when the value reached the upper limit. yThe upper limit of the histogram is 999999. The values display stops updating when the upper limit is reached. yThe histogram and judgment record are reset under the following conditions:- When the [Reset Stat.] button is clicked- When the power of the sensor is turned OFF- When the tool is added/deleted/copied- When the upper limit of the Color Area/Area

tool is enabled/disabled or when the setting scale is changed by the user operation or Tool Auto Tuning

- When the Tool Auto Tuning is started if more than two tools other than the position adjustment tool are being set

- When the program is switched- When each correction of the setup adjustment

is started- When the sensor is initialized y [Reset Stat.] button is displayed together with the statistical information.


Hiding the tool information

1 Select [View] → [Tool Data] on menu bar to release the check mark.

The tool information becomes hidden.

5

Operating/A

djusting


Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

The method for manually adjusting the threshold while in the Test mode.

The threshold can be adjusted by the Limit Adjustment in the tool settings of the Settings Navigator.

1 Open the main screen in [Program]. “Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]” (Page 5-3)

2 Click the [Limit Adjustment] button.

The [Limit Adjustment] button is available when the program that the tool has been set is selected.

The Limit Adjustment screen appears.

3 If multiple tools are set in the program, select the tool to adjust the threshold.

Select the tool

4 Image a high or low-quality-target to be the reference of judgment.If the target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger. If an external

trigger cannot be input, click the

button (Page 3-11) to image the target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily.


the imaging with the internal trigger finishes.

5 Adjust the threshold by checking the matching rate.<Setting example>If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the low-quality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to 65 of the value intermediate between 40 and 90.

Adjust the threshold

Matching rate

yA target is detected as OK if the matching rate is greater than the threshold, and detected as NG if the matching rate is lower than the threshold. y In accordance with the status result of the tool, the display color of the tool changes.

“Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7) yThe threshold can be changed by using the slider or inputting values. yA target is judged by the new threshold from the judgment process of the trigger output after the threshold is changed. yThe threshold can be adjusted by checking the histogram result. The displayed contents during threshold adjustment are as follows.- The histogram before threshold adjustment

is displayed.- The status results during threshold

adjustment are not added to the frequency distribution of the histogram.

- The judgment record and the matching rate information (Page 5-12) are not displayed.

6 After the adjustment is completed, click the [Complete] button.When the threshold is changed, the save settings confirmation dialog appears. When the [Yes] button is clicked, the settings will be saved, and the system returns to the main screen in [Program].

5

Operating/A

djusting


Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

The Tool Auto Tuning is a function to automatically adjust the judgment condition for the detection tool and the judgment threshold for each tool by using multiple high-quality-targets (OK images) and low-quality-targets (NG images).There are three methods to register the image to be used for Tool Auto Tuning.

z� Using the images taken in the Test modeThis is the method to register the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while preparing the multiple high and low-quality-target and checking the results of the test operation.

NG

OK

OK

NG

OK

Perform tuning by imaging targets which are judged as OK or NG

z� Using the image history saved in the sensorThis is the method to register the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while checking the images read from the Sensor’s internal image history.


Sensor’s internal image history

Perform tuning by reading the images judged as OK or NG from the Sensor’s internal image history

z� Using the image files saved in the PCThis is the method to register the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while checking the images read from the PC. Batch backup files (*.iva) and image capture files (*.ivp) can be used.

“Backing up in a batch” (Page 6-21) “Saving images and screens displayed on the IV-Navigator individually” (Page 6-22)

Batch backup file (*.iva)Image capture file (*.ivp)

Perform tuning by reading the images are judged as OK or NG from PC.


5

Operating/A

djusting



Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning

High-quality-target

No

Yes

Low-quality-target

AutoTune as OK

Automatically adjust the judgment condition and threshold

Image a target

Finish

Judgment of an image?

AutoTune as NG

Add image?

Select the tool

Start

* There are three methods to prepare images.* Up to 24 images can be used for tuning.

The main screen for the Tool Auto TuningContents of the main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning are as follows.

(4)

(7)

(6)

(1)

(2)

(10)(9)(8)

(5)

(3)

(1) Tool panelDisplays the name and threshold of Tool Auto Tuning target.If you select an image in [OK Image List] or [NG Image List], its judgment value and status result will be displayed.

(2) [Perform Image Registration] buttonThe image registration method screen is displayed by clicking the [Perform Image Registration] button. Select a registration method and perform Tool Auto Tuning.

“Register the images taken with the sensor” (Page 5-19)

“Registering the images from the image history saved in the sensor” (Page 5-21)

“Registering the image files saved in the PC” (Page 5-23)

(3) [Show] buttonDisplays the display screen and displays the selected image in [OK Image List] or [NG Image List].

“Confirming or deleting the images registered for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-26)

5

Operating/A

djusting



(4) [Delete] buttonDeletes the selected image from the [OK Image List] or [NG Image List].


(5) Display Master ImageDisplay the master image that is currently registered.

(6) [OK Image List] / [NG Image List]Displays the image thumbnails registered as OK image or NG image.

(7) [Test Running] buttonDisplays the test operation screen and perform the test operation in accordance with the OK image / NG image registered in Tool Auto Tuning.

“Confirming the registration results in the test mode” (Page 5-27)

(8) Registration information file nameDisplays the registration information file name for saving the result of Tool Auto Tuning .

(9) [Other Tools] buttonIf multiple tools are set in the program, a tool selection screen will be displayed.

(10) [Exit] buttonSaves the registered OK image / NG image and returns to the main screen in [Program].

Operation for the Tool Auto TuningDisplays the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning from the main screen in [Program] to perform Tool Auto Tuning.

yThe position adjustment tool is not target for the Tool Auto Tuning. yThe Color Area/Area tools with the [Fixed Reference Area] set as [Enable] are excluded from a Tool Auto Tuning target.


2 Click the [Inspection Tool Auto Tuning] button.

The import confirmation dialog for registration data file (*.ivm) appears.

3 Click the [No] button.To perform the Tool Auto Tuning with registration data file (*.ivm), click the [Yes] button.For details, refer to “Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration information” (Page 5-27).

5

Operating/A

djusting



4 If multiple tools are set in the program, select the tool for Tool Auto Tuning, and click the [OK] button.

Select the tool

The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning opens. “The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-16)

5 Click the [Perform Image Registration] button.

The image registration method screen opens.

6 Select the registration source of the image to be registered to the Tool Auto Tuning and register the image.

zz For registration of an image taken with the sensor

“Register the images taken with the sensor” (Page 5-19)

zz For registration of an image whose history has been saved in the sensor

“Registering the images from the image history saved in the sensor” (Page 5-21)

zz For registration of an image file saved in the PC

“Registering the image files saved in the PC” (Page 5-23)

7 To confirm or delete the registered images, click the [Show] or [Delete] button.


8 To confirm the status result with the registered contents, click the [Test Running] button.

“Confirming the registration results in the test mode” (Page 5-27)

9 After the setting is completed, click the [Exit] button.

The confirmation dialog whether or not to save the settings appears.

10 Click the [Yes] button.The confirmation dialog appears.

5

Operating/A

djusting



11 To save the registered image to the registration data file (*.ivm), click the [Yes] button.The save as screen opens.The system returns to the main screen in [Program] if you the [No] button.

“Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration information” (Page 5-27)

12 Select an arbitrary folder and click the [Save] button.The image will be saved, and the system returns to the main screen in [Program].

Registering the OK/NG images to be used for the Tool Auto Tuning

Register the images taken with the sensorRegisters the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while preparing the multiple high and low-quality-target and checking the images imaged.

1 Open the main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning.

“Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-17)

2 Click the [Perform Image Registration] button.The image registration method screen opens.

3 Select [Take a Picture] and click the [OK] button.

The image registration screen opens.

4 Image the high-quality-target to be the criteria for OK status or low-quality-target to be the criteria for NG status, and click the [Register the image.] button.

If the target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger. If an external

trigger cannot be input, click the

button (Page 3-11) to image the target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily.



5

Operating/A

djusting



5 Check the displayed image and select the [OK Image] or [NG Image] button.

zz For Outline tool

By clicking the [Capture image again.] button, the system returns to the Live image to re-edit the image.

zz For Color Area tool (color type)

If the extraction range is inappropriate, click the color to be the reference of judgment, or click the [+]/[-] button for extract color settings to expand/reduce the color range to be extracted.

yBy clicking the [Undo] button, the previous operation can be cancelled. yTo change the color of extraction target, click the [Clear] button and click the color to be the reference of judgment again. yBy clicking the [Capture image again.] button, the system returns to the Live image to re-edit the image.

zz For Area tool (monochrome type)

If the extraction range is inappropriate, click brightness to be the reference of judgment, or operate the slider and expand/reduce the brightness range to be extracted.

yBy clicking the [Undo] button, the previous operation can be cancelled. yTo change brightness of extraction target, click the [Clear] button and click brightness to be the reference of judgment again. yBy clicking the [Capture image again.] button, the system returns to the Live image to re-edit the image.

6 Click the [Registration] button.

The changes in settings after the auto tuning will be displayed.If the auto tuning has failed, follow the message to change the tool settings or the image to be registered.

7 Check the changes in settings and click the [OK] button.

Changed settings

The confirmation dialog to register another image appears.

5

Operating/A

djusting



8 Click the [Yes] button and repeat step 2 to 7.

yRegistering one or more OK images and NG images is recommended. yUp to 24 images can be registered.

9 After the registration is completed, click the [No] button on the confirmation dialog.The system returns to the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning.


Registering the images from the image history saved in the sensor

Registers the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while checking the images loaded from the Sensor’s internal image history.




3 Select [Selection image history] and click the [OK] button.


4 Select the image history to be the OK or NG image and click the [OK] button.

Select the image


5

Operating/A

djusting




The status result displayed on the screen is the status result by the settings at the time of saving the image. If the tool settings are changed after the image is saved, only the frame of the tool window will be displayed regardless of selection of the tool display method (Page 5-7). The processing status will not be displayed.

zz For Outline tool


If the extraction range is inappropriate, click the color to be the reference of judgment, or click the [+]/[-] button for color extraction settings to expand/reduce the color range to be extracted.

yBy clicking the [Undo] button, the previous operation can be cancelled. yTo change the color of extraction target, click the [Clear] button and click the color to be the reference of judgment again.



yBy clicking the [Undo] button, the previous operation can be cancelled. yTo change brightness of extraction target, click the [Clear] button and click brightness to be the reference of judgment again.




Changed settings


5

Operating/A

djusting



8 Click the [Yes] button and repeat step 2 to 7.

yRegistering one or more OK images and NG images is recommended. yUp to 24 images can be registered.

9 After the registration is completed, click the [No] button on the confirmation dialog.The system returns to the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning.


Registering the image files saved in the PCRegisters the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while checking the images loaded from the files saved in the PC.




3 Select [Selection file] and click the [OK] button.

The open dialog appears.

4 Select the file type (the batch backup file (*.iva) or image capture file (*.ivp)) for loading images.

Select the file type

File formats other than iva or ivp cannot be loaded.

5

Operating/A

djusting



5 Select a file and click the [Open] button.

6 To use the batch backup file (*.iva), select a registered image.The selection screen for the image type opens. Select an option for [Image Type] and click the [OK] button.

The IVA image history selection screen or the IVA master image selection screen opens. Select an image and click the [OK] button.

Select an image



yThe status result displayed on the screen for the batch backup file (*.iva) is the status result by the settings at the time of saving the image. Only the frame of the tool window will be displayed regardless of selection of the tool display method (Page 5-7). The processing status will not be displayed. yFor the image capture file (*.ivp), only the image will be displayed.

zz For Outline tool


If the extraction range is inappropriate, click the color to be the reference of judgment, or click the [+]/[-] button for color extraction settings to expand/reduce the color range to be extracted.

yBy clicking the [Undo] button, the previous operation can be cancelled. yTo change the color of extraction target, click the [Clear] button and click the color to be the reference of judgment again.

5

Operating/A

djusting





yBy clicking the [Undo] button, the previous operation can be cancelled. yTo change brightness of extraction target, click the [Clear] button and click brightness to be the reference of judgment again.




Changed settings


10 Click the [Yes] button and register the images repeatedly.

y If using the batch backup file (*.iva), repeat steps 6 to 9. y If using the image capture file (*.ivp), repeat steps 5 to 9. yRegistering one or more OK images and NG images is recommended. yUp to 24 images can be registered.

11 After the registration is completed, click the [No] button on the confirmation dialog.The system returns to the main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning.


5

Operating/A

djusting



Confirming or deleting the images registered for the Tool Auto Tuning

Confirm or delete the OK/NG images registered for the Tool Auto Tuning.

Confirming the OK/NG images



2 Select the image for confirmation.

Select the image

3 Click the [Show] button.

The display screen opens.

4 Confirm the selected image.

Judgment value and status result for the registered image

5 After the confirmation is completed, click the [Close] button.The system returns to the main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning.

Deleting the OK/NG images



2 Select the image for deletion.

Select the image

3 Click the [Delete] button.

The confirmation dialog to delete appears.

4 Click the [Yes] button.Image is deleted and Tool Auto Tuning is performed again.The system returns to the main screen of Tool Auto Tuning by clicking the [OK] button.

5

Operating/A

djusting



Confirming the registration results in the test mode

You can perform the test operation and confirm the status result with Tool Auto Tuning.



2 Click the [Test Running] button.

The Text Running screen opens.

3 Confirm the status result with Tool Auto Tuning.

Judgment value and status result for test operation

4 After the confirmation is completed, click the [Close] button.The system returns to the main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning.

Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration information

When the previous Tool Auto Tuning information (registration data file (*.ivm)) is used, the Tool Auto Tuning can be performed skipping the OK/NG image registration process.It is useful for re-adjusting the tool settings and repeating the Tool Auto Tuning.

Registration data file (*.ivm)

Perform tuning by loading the OK/NG images registered in the previous Tool Auto Tuning


2 Click the [Inspection Tool Auto Tuning] button.

The import confirmation dialog for registration information file (*.ivm) appears.

3 Click the [Yes] button.

The screen to select a file opens.

5

Operating/A

djusting



4 Select a registration data file to load (*.ivm) and click the [Open] button.

The previous information will be re-adjusted and the modified contents will be displayed.


Changed settings

The message loading completion appears.


7 If multiple tools are set in the program, select the target tool for the Tool Auto Tuning and click the [OK] button.

Select the tool

The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning opens.

“The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-16)

8 To add images, click the [Perform Image Registration] button and register the OK/NG images.

“Registering the OK/NG images to be used for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-19)

9 After the setting is completed, click the [Exit] button.

The confirmation dialog whether or not to save the settings appears.

10 Click the [Yes] button.The confirmation dialog appears.

11 To save the registered image to the registration information file (*.ivm), click the [Yes] button.The save as screen opens.The system returns to the main screen in [Program] if you click the [No] button.

12 Select an arbitrary folder and click the [Save] button.The image will be saved, and the system returns to the main screen in [Program].

5

Operating/A

djusting


Stabilizing the Judgment Process

This section explains how to adjust the device when the judgment process is not stable.To stabilize the judgment process, it is necessary to take clear image of the target and adjust the detection tool such that it functions in a stable manner.

yStabilize the judgment process by clearly imaging the target (Page 5-29)- Adjust the installation distance to image the target widely- Correct the distorted image due to the installation- Make the image bright enough- Focus well- Make the image slur less- Make the glossy or metal surface shine less- Adjust the color tint (for color type only)- Make the image less influenced by the lighting condition yStabilize by adjusting the position gap of the target (Page 5-33) yStabilize the position adjustment (Page 5-34) yStabilize the Outline tool (Page 5-35) yStabilize the Color Area/Area tool (Page 5-36)

If the judgment process is adjusted to make it stabilize, the process time may become longer depending on the function used. Adjust the judgment process while confirming the balance within the process time.

Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear image of the target

Adjusts so that the images which can clearly recognize differences between high and low-quality-target by the detection tools can be imaged.

Imaging the target widelyThe judgment process stabilizes by taking a large image of the target onto the screen.

z� Adjusting the installed distance (WD)Install the sensor close to the target.Install the sensor at the appropriate distance from the target upon checking the field of view and the installed distance of the sensor.

“Checking the view and installed distance” (Page 2-2)

¡z: Adequate × : Inadequate

z� Using the digital zooming functionFor the monochrome type, the target can be imaged larger using the digital zooming function.

“Digital Zoom (monochrome type only)” (Page 4-18)


5

Operating/A

djusting



Correcting the distorted images due to the installation

If the sensor is not installed just in front of the target due to the sensor installation restrictions and/or to prevent a shine on the target’s surface, the target image may become trapezoidally distorted.The tilt correction corrects these images and displays them without distortion.

“Tilt Correction” (Page 6-40)

Top view

Lateral view

Before tilt correction

After tilt correction(vertical)

Indicator light

Target

Target

Achieving adequate image brightnessIf the image is too dark, the judgment process for high and low-quality-targets becomes unstable due to poor contrast. Also, if the image is too bright, the judgment process may become unstable.Brightness can be adjusted with Automatic Brightness Adjustment.

“Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11)“Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11)

z� If brightness cannot be adjusted in the Automatic Brightness AdjustmentFiner brightness adjustments can be made in Advanced Brightness Adjustment.


zz Imaging ModeWhen “High Gain” is selected in the imaging mode, the brightness amplification factor increases resulting in a brighter screen.

zz BrightnessSetting a higher brightness value gives a longer exposure time, resulting in a brighter screen.

z� If brightness cannot be adjusted due to uneven brightnessRefer to “Reducing the shininess of the glossy or metal surface” (Page 5-32).

5

Operating/A

djusting



Achieving good focusAdjusting the focus is required to clearly image of the target. For the auto focus type, focus can be adjusted easily with the Automatic Focus Adjustment. For the manual focus type, the focus can be adjusted while confirming the image and focus indicator.

“Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13)“Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13)

z� If good focus cannot be achieved by the Automatic Focus AdjustmentThe focusing position may not be adjusted correctly if the image is too dark or too bright. Adjust to the applicable brightness with Automatic Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11) and then perform the Automatic Focus Adjustment.If the focus still cannot be adjusted with the Automatic Focus Adjustment for the auto focus type, adjust the focus manually.

“When the focusing position is to be adjusted manually” (Page 4-14)

Adjust the focus position by the slider.

Reducing the image blurIf the image is blurred by imaging a moving target, the image blurring can be corrected by shortening the exposure time (shutter time). Adjust the exposure time with the brightness adjustment.


Exposure Time

zz Imaging ModeSelect [High Gain] in the imaging mode so that the brightness gain becomes higher. The screen becomes brighter so that the exposure time can be shortened and the image blurring can be reduced. The image noise may increase.Also, the exposure time may be shortened if the [HDR] is selected in the imaging mode.

zz BrightnessWhen the value of brightness is reduced, the exposure time becomes shorter resulting in a less blurry image.

By unmounting the dome attachment or polarizing filter attachment, image blurring can be lessened as the exposure time can be shortened.

5

Operating/A

djusting



Reducing the shininess of the glossy or metal surface

Glossy and/or metal surface may reflect the built-in light into the camera. Since mirror reflection has a high-light intensity, the amount of light received will be saturated and the surface will shine. This section explains how to reduce the shininess.

z� Using the Automatic Brightness AdjustmentIf the target shines, the HDR function is enabled automatically and it can be reduced by performing Automatic brightness adjustment.The HDR (High Dynamic Range) function is a function that prevents light saturation in the shining area by imaging the target with a wider dynamic range. The HDR function can also be adjusted manually.

“Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11)

z� Using the dome attachmentUse the dome attachment (IV-D10).The dome attachment emits even diffused light from the entire circumference to the target, so that the contrast becomes less and the shine on the target’s surface is reduced.This is effective for targets of all shapes.

“Using the dome attachment” (Page 2-6)“Using the dome attachment” (Page 2-6)

Target

Diffusion light

Dome attachment

z� Using the polarizing filter attachmentUse the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87436/OP-87437). The optical characteristics of the polarizing filter attachment cut off the mirror reflection and reduce the shine on the target’s surface.


z� Installing the sensor at an angleThe built-in lighting will not reflected back into the camera, so the shine on the target’s surface can be reduced.This is effective for flat-surface targets.

When the sensor is installed in front of the target

When the sensor is installed at an angle from the target

The mirror reflection of the built-in light reflects into the camera and causes the surface to shine.

The mirror reflection of the built-in light does not reflect into the camera so no surface shine occurs.

If the image is distorted by tilting the sensor, the image can be corrected by the tilt correction function.


5

Operating/A

djusting



Adjusting the color tint (for color type only)

Adjust the white balance if the color tint of the color type image is different from that of the target.


Reducing the effect of illumination variation

If the detection is not stable due to the ambient light from the surroundings where the sensor is installed, the effect of the illumination variation can be reduced by the brightness correction function.If the detection cannot be stabilized with the brightness correction function, use a shielding around the sensor to prevent from the ambient light.

“Brightness Correction” (Page 4-25)“Brightness Correction” (Page 4-25)

Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned target position

If there is a variation (misalignment) in the positioning of the target, the position to be judged is also declined from the tool window and cannot be judged correctly.The detection can be stabilized by using the position adjusting function.

“Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-53)“Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-53)

z� Tool settings


Master image

z� Processing during an operation



Position adjustment process

5

Operating/A

djusting



Stabilizing the position adjustmentThis section explains how to adjust when the position adjustment is not stable.

“Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-53)“Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-53)

z� Basic adjustmentsSet the position adjustment window as large as possible by selecting a part that contains a unique shape.If there are many variation of a target shapes that a position adjustment window has been set, set the threshold which has lower matching rate.

¡ : Good example

Position adjustment window

Since the convex part assigned in the position adjustment window does not exist in any other part of the target, the position adjustment can be performed correctly without being recognition error.

× : Bad example

Position adjustment window

Example 1

Example 2

The position adjustment cannot function correctly in the following examples.Example 1: The straight line that the position

adjustment window is set cannot be identified uniquely because there are many similar straight lines exist in other parts of the target.

Example 2: The angle section that the position adjustment window is set cannot be identified uniquely because there are many similar angle sections exist in other parts of the target.

z� If the target tilts and the position adjustment becomes unstable

Search regionRotation range

zz Rotation range yBroaden the rotation range if the tilt of the target exceeds the rotation range (default value: ± 20°).

“Rotation Range” (Page 4-59)“Rotation Range” (Page 4-59) yTo stabilize the position adjustment, the tool window will search with the range ± few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range. (The tool window will search ± few degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0°.)Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like to detect the target in accordance with the set rotation angle of the target.

“Margin” (Page 4-59)“Margin” (Page 4-59)

zz Search regionBroaden the search region if the variation in the position determining of the target exceeds the region to be searched.

“Setting a search region” (Page 4-57)“Setting a search region” (Page 4-57)

z� If the position adjustment becomes unstable due to the effect of the unwanted outlines

yThe outline disabling function can disable unwanted outlines.

“Settings for disabling outlines” (Page 4-58)“Settings for disabling outlines” (Page 4-58) ySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low].

“Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-57)“Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-57)

5

Operating/A

djusting



z� If the outline of the reference target cannot be detected

y If the contrast of the target is low, the outline may not be extracted. Set the extraction sensitivity to [High].

“Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-57)“Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-57)If the process remain unstable even after setting the extraction sensitivity to [Hi Sensitivity], it is necessary to adjust the exposure condition for the target.

“Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear image of the target” (Page 5-29)

yFor the color type, the outline extraction may become stable by using the color filter.

“Color filters (color type only)” (Page 4-18)

Stabilizing the Outline toolThis section explains how to adjust the outline tool when the judgment for high and low-quality-targets is not stable.

“Outline tool” (Page 4-34)“Outline tool” (Page 4-34)

z� Basic adjustments ySet the tool window as large as possible by selecting a part contains a unique shape. y If the same or similar shapes are misrecognized, set the search region so that no outlines are searched beyond the target area.

“Setting a search region” (Page 4-37)“Setting a search region” (Page 4-37) yAdjust the threshold to the average of the high and low-quality-target. The judgment condition and threshold can also be optimized automatically to the most appropriate condition and value by using the Tool Auto Tuning.

“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page 5-14) “Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)” (Page 5-15)

z� If the outline cannot be detected when the target becomes out of positionAdjusts the search region. Broaden the search region if the varies of the position determining of the target exceeds the region to be searched.


z� If the detection becomes unstable due to the effect of the unwanted outline other than the target

yThe outline disabling function can disable unwanted outlines.

“Settings for removing outlines” (Page 4-38)“Settings for removing outlines” (Page 4-38) ySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low].

“Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-37)“Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-37) ySet the search region so that non-target images containing unwanted outlines are not searched.

“Setting a search region” (Page 4-37)“Setting a search region” (Page 4-37) ySet the search algorithm to [High].

“Search Algorithm” (Page 4-40)“Search Algorithm” (Page 4-40) yMake an image with no unwanted outlines by making the target background plain, etc.

5

Operating/A

djusting



z� If the target tilts and the outline cannot be detected

yAdjusts the rotation range. Broaden the rotation range if the tilt of the target exceeds the rotation range (default value: ± 20°).

“Rotation Range” (Page 4-39)“Rotation Range” (Page 4-39) yTo stabilize the detection, the tool window will search with the range ± few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range. (The tool window will search ± few degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0°.)Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like to detect the target in accordance with the set rotation angle of the target.

“Margin” (Page 4-40)“Margin” (Page 4-40)

z� If the match rate difference between the high and low-quality-targets is smallAdjusts the search algorithm. If there is no difference between the match rate for high and low-quality-target, select the [Hi accuracy]. This will result in better judgment accuracy. However, the processing time becomes longer.

“Search Algorithm” (Page 4-40)“Search Algorithm” (Page 4-40)

z� If the outline of the target cannot be detected

y If the contrast of the target is low, the outline may not be extracted. Set the extraction sensitivity to [High].

“Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-37)“Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-37)If the process remain unstable even after setting the extraction sensitivity to [High Sensitivity], it is necessary to adjust the exposure condition for the target.

“Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear image of the target” (Page 5-29)

yFor the color type, the outline extraction may become stable by using the color filter.

“Color filters (color type only)” (Page 4-18)

Stabilizing the Color Area/Area toolThis section explains how to adjust the Color Area/Area tool when the judgment for the high and low-quality-target is not stable.

“Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-42)“Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-42)

z� Basic adjustmentsAdjust the threshold to the average of the high and low-quality-target. The color extraction range, brightness extraction range and threshold can also be optimized automatically to the most appropriate ranges and values by using the Tool Auto Tuning.



z� If the color you wish to judge cannot be extracted

yClick and extract the color or brightness to be the reference for judgment. yBy repeatedly clicking the un-extracted color or brightness, the extraction range can be added. yAdjust the extraction range with the extraction range zoom in/zoom out ([+]/[-] buttons). Click the [+] button to expand the color or brightness range currently being extracted. Click the [-] button to reduce the range. “Setting the Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-44)“Setting the Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-44)

ySet the [Fixed Reference Area] to [Enable]. “Extended Functions of the Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-50)

z� If the area search becomes unstable due to unwanted colors being extractedAdjusts with the mask function. The region in which unwanted colors are extracted can be masked.

“Mask settings” (Page 4-47)“Mask settings” (Page 4-47)

5

Operating/A

djusting


Shortening the Processing Time

This section explains how to adjust the device to shorten the processing time.To shorten the processing time, perform adjustments to shorten the processing times of the imaging process and the detection tools.

yShorten the imaging processing time (Page 5-38) yShorten the processing time of the detection tools (Page 5-38) yShorten the processing time of the Outline tool (Page 5-38) yShorten the processing time of the Color Area/Area tool (Page 5-39) yShorten the processing time of the position adjustment (Page 5-39)

If the processing time is shortened, the stability of judgment may decrease. The processing time should therefore be adjusted with a view of maintaining balance with the stability of the judgment process.

For the processing timeThe processing time is the period of time from when an external or internal trigger is received until the status result is finalized.Processing time is displayed in the statistical information.


z� Flow of the internal process

Trigger input

Imaging

(Tilt Correction)

(Brightness Correction)

(Position Adjustment)

Tool 1 process

Tool 2 process

Tool n process

Status output

Processing time

Methods to shorten the processing time are as follows. yShortening the imaging processing time. yShortening the processing time of each tool. yDo not use correction functions (tilt correction, brightness correction, and position adjustment). yDo not use the FTP client function. yDo not use a field network.


5

Operating/A

djusting



Shortening the imaging processing time

zz Imaging AareaThe processing time can be shortened by adjusting the imaging area.

Entire imaging area (default value)Reduce the imaging area

Non-imaged areaReduce the imaging area by setting the imaging area from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial]. The processing time for capturing the image in non-imaged area can be shortened. The importing time will be shortened by narrowing the vertical direction (V).

“Imaging Area” (Page 4-17)“Imaging Area” (Page 4-17)

zz Exposure timeThe processing time can be shortened by shortening the exposure time (Page 4-11). The longer exposure time makes the processing time longer than the displayed exposure time.

By unmounting the dome attachment or polarizing filter attachment, the exposure time can be shortened.

Selecting the toolThe processing time of the Color Area/Area tool will be shorter than the Outline tool. Therefore, you should select the Color Area/Area tool whenever possible.

Shortening the processing time of each tool

Shortening the processing time of the Outline tool

The processing time can be shortened by adjusting the settings for the search region, rotation range, and search algorithm.


zz Search regionThe searching time can be shortened by reducing the search region and setting the region from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial].Make sure that the range of position determining of the target does not exceed the search region.


zz Rotation rangeThe target search time while rotating the master image can be shortened by reducing the rotation range (default value: ± 20°).Make sure that the range of an installation angle of the target does not exceed the rotation range.

“Rotation Range” (Page 4-39)“Rotation Range” (Page 4-39)

zz Search algorithmSelect [Hi speed]. This will decrease the judgment accuracy, but the processing time will be shorter.

“Search Algorithm” (Page 4-40)“Search Algorithm” (Page 4-40)

zz Producing an image with less unwanted outlinesThe processing time becomes longer for images with multiple unwanted outlines other than the target outlines.

yMake an image with no unwanted outlines by making the target background plain, etc. ySet the search region so that non-target images containing unwanted outlines are not searched. “Setting a search region” (Page 4-37)“Setting a search region” (Page 4-37)

5

Operating/A

djusting



Shortening the processing time of the Color Area/Area tool

The processing time can be shortened by adjusting the window shape settings.

Window shape

zz Window shapeIf the current window shape is [Entire], reduce the window shape by modifying the setting to [Rect] or [Circle].The processing time can be shortened by reducing the time required for the area processing.

“Setting the Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-44)

Shortening the processing time of the position adjustment

When the position adjustment is used, the processing time can be shortened by adjusting the search region or rotation range settings.


zz Search regionThe searching time can be shortened by reducing the search region and setting the region from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial].Note that the range of the target position that the position adjustment function can correct becomes narrower.


zz Rotation rangeThe target search time while rotating the master image can be shortened by reducing the rotation range (default value: ± 20°).Note that the range of the target angle that the position adjustment function can correct becomes narrower.

“Rotation Range” (Page 4-59)“Rotation Range” (Page 4-59)

zz Producing an image with less unwanted outlinesThe processing time becomes longer for images with multiple unwanted outlines other than the target outlines.

yMake an image with no unwanted outlines by making the target background plain, etc. ySet the search region so that non-target images containing unwanted outlines are not searched. “Setting a search region” (Page 4-57)“Setting a search region” (Page 4-57)

5

Operating/A

djusting



MEMO

5

Operating/A

djusting


This chapter explains the useful features and operations of the sensor and IV-Navigator, the Program Details screen, the Sensor's internal image history screen, the I/O Settings screen, and the Advanced screen.Also, explains the operation of the menu bar.

List of the Useful Features ...............................6-2Changeover for a Target (Program Functions) .........................................6-6Sensor's Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG) ............................6-15Saving the Sensor Settings and Images .......6-21Setting the Input and Output Information of the Sensor ..................6-26Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor ........................................................6-30Operating from the menu bar .........................6-45Converting IVP Data to BMP Data Using the IVP-Converter .................................6-51

6

Useful Features/Various Functions

6



List of the Useful Features

Useful features while running

Items Things you want to do Useful functions Description Reference page

Operation

Change over the program Program functionUp to 32 types (products) of products can be registeredand loaded.

6-6

Assign a name to the settings of each product for easy identification

Program function A name can be assigned to the used program. 6-12

Prevent misoperation by the operator Password Lock

Misoperation can be prevented by setting a password on the screen.

6-34

Assign a name to each sensor for easy identification Device Name A device name and a study name

can be assigned to the sensor. 6-31

Automatically register the master image

External master registration

Registers the master image from external input. 6-26

Analysis

Automatically save and confirm the NG images

Sensor’s internal image history

The latest 100 images (in color) or 300 images (in monochrome) can be saved into the memory of the sensor and confirmed them.

6-15

Confirm the image history in the sensor saved as a batch backup file (*.iva).

SimulatorThe image history can be confirmed by using a batch backup file (*.iva).

7-1

Save a sensor image displayed on the IV-Navigator into the PC Save Image

The sensor images and the IV-Navigator’s screen can be saved by clicking the [Save Image] button.

6-22Capture the IV-Navigator’s screen

Check the operation status statistically

Statistical process screen

The statistical data of the processing times and results can be confirmed.

5-10

Check the operation status with a histogram Histogram screen

The status result of each tool can be displayed in the histogram screen.

5-12

Automatically save data of the images captured by the sensor and the status result information outside the sensor

FTP client function

Data of the images captured by the sensor and the status result information can be automatically transferred to an FTP server.

6-36

Convert image files in IVP format to BMP format in batch IVP-Converter

Image data in IVP format individually saved in the image history or saved by FTP transfer can be converted to BMP format in batch.

6-51


6





Display

Zoom in/out the images Zoom In/Zoom Out button

The zoom ratio can be changed to 100%/125%/150%/ 200%/300%/500%.

3-11

Change the display language LanguageThe language can be changed to Japanese, English, Deutsch, Chinese (Simplified), or Chinese (Traditional).

3-26-49

Hide the trigger button Manual Trigger button

The [Manual Trigger] button displayed when the external trigger is selected can be switched to show/hide.

6-48

Make the screen update faster

Image while Running

If the image does not need to be displayed, the screen update can become faster by setting to display the status result only.

6-48

Useful features during installation/adjustment


Judgment process

Stabilize the judgment. - Adjusts the sensor installation and the settings navigator. 5-29

Shorten the process time - Adjusts the settings navigator. 5-37

Issue an internal trigger and perform judgment process within the shortest cycle

- Sets the trigger interval to 1ms. 8-3

ThresholdAdjust the threshold for the detection by using the saved images

Inspection Tool Auto Tuning

The threshold can be set automatically by selecting an image and specifying to OK or NG.

5-15

Imaging

Prevent the internal lighting from blinking

Lighting Mode (Continuous)

The light can be set to stay lit at all times by synchronizing with the trigger.

4-19

Correct the distorted images due to being taken from an angle

Tilt Correction

The distorted images due to the limitations for the sensor installation can be corrected and displayed correctly.

6-40

Adjust the color tint (white balance) White Balance The color tint can be adjusted

and displayed correctly. 6-42

Correct the images of a target that are rotated 180°

Image display direction

The image of a target can be rotated 180° without adjusting the sensor's position.

6-43

6





Settings

Confirm/edit the settings without connecting to the sensor. Simulator

The settings can be confirmed or edited by using a batch backup files (*.iva).

7-1

Back up the settings to the PC Batch Backup

Read all the settings for the sensor and those can be saved into the PC.

6-21

Copy the settings to multiple sensors

Transfer Program Settings

The batch backup data stored into the PC can be transferred to another sensor.

6-23

Copy the settings and use the settings to set another product

Program function

The settings of a set program number which has been set can be copied to another program number.

6-12

The settings for a specific set program number which have been saved in the batch backup file (*.iva) can be imported.

6-13

Confirm the settings of the sensor with the list. Export

The list of settings can be confirmed with Microsoft Excel etc.

6-45

Initialize the settings of the sensor Initialize Sensor The settings can be initialized

to the factory default. 6-44

Confirm the version of the sensor Sensor Information

The version for the model or the operation software can be confirmed.

6-31

Confirm the version information of the IV-Navigator. Version information The version of the IV-Navigator

can be confirmed. 6-50

6





I/O line

Confirm whether or not the input and output line are correctly wired

I/O MonitorThe operation test for the input and output line can be performed.

6-28

Switch to NPN output or PNP output I/O Polarity

The polarity can be changed to NPN or PNP according to the control unit currently used.

6-28

Switch the output to N.O. or N.C. Output format The settings for each OUT can

be changed to N.O. or N.C. 6-27

Output the status output with one-shot Output Type The output can be changed from

level output to one-shot output. 6-27

Output the status output with on-delay

Common Output Settings

On-delay time can be set for the one-shot output. 6-27

Switch the external trigger to rise or fall Input Assignment

Rising trigger or falling trigger can be selected as the operation of the external trigger

6-26

Output the NG status results Total status NG output

When the total status result of each detection tool was NG, the total status NG output function turns ON.

4-61

Confirm whether or not the sensor is running properly RUN output

When the sensor is running with no system error occurring, the output function turns ON.

4-61

Form a logical operation of status result Logic output

Logical operation result of each detection tool can be assigned to the output function.

4-64

Change the total status conditions

Total status conditions

The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK]/[Any Tool OK]/[Logic 1] to [Logic 4].

4-64

6



Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)

Overview of the program functionsThe sensor can save the judgment condition set in the settings navigator as a program up to 32 types (32 products).By reading the judgment condition which has been saved according to each product, changeover can be done easily.

Sensor

PROG31 : Product XX

• • •

PROG02 : Product C

PROG01 : Product B

PROG00 : Product A

Settings Navigator y Imaging settings*1

yMaster image yTool settings*2

yOutput Assignment

Sensor Advanced yEnvironmental ySetup Adjustment ySwitching programs

*1 The auto focus type includes the focusing position.

*2 Including the threshold of each tool.

Things can be performed with the program functions ySaves 32 types (32 products) of judgment conditions (programs).


yReads and operates the saved program. “Using the program functions (changing over)” (Page 6-9)

ySelects the reading method of the program. “Input Settings” (Page 6-26)

yNames the judgment conditions (programs). “Editing a program name” (Page 6-12)

yCopies and uses the judgment conditions (programs).

“Copying a program” (Page 6-12)

yReturns the judgment conditions (programs) to the status before setting.

“Initializing a program” (Page 6-14)


6




Preparing the program functionsRegisters the judgment condition for each product to the program before running.

Preparation flow

(1) Select a program numberSelect a program number to register a judgment condition from PROG00 to PROG31.

(2) Set a judgment condition in the Settings NavigatorSet the judgment condition for a product in the Settings Navigator.

(3) Select a program switch methodThe switching method can be selected from the following items.

ySwitching from the external input line. ySelecting the program from the main screen in [Run]. yDisplaying the Program Details screen and selecting the program. ySwitching from a field networkFor the details of the procedure for switching from a field network, refer to “IV Series User’s Manual (Field Network)”.

The following functions can be used with the preparations for the program function.

yThe product name can be registered to the program.

“Editing a program name” (Page 6-12) yTo register a similar product, the program can be copied, and then the settings can be edited.

“Copying a program” (Page 6-12) ySettings can be changed after importing the program in the batch backup file.

“Importing a program” (Page 6-13) y Initializes and returns the judgment condition registered in the program to the status before setting.


Preparation procedures

1 Display the main screen in [Program]. “Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]” (Page 5-3)

2 Select a program number to register a judgment condition of a product.

Select the program

The program can also be selected from the [Detail] button (Page 6-11).

3 Set a judgment condition in the Sensor Setup screen.


4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to register programs for the number of products that are to be changed over.

6




5 To switch the program by inputting a signal from the PLC etc. to the input line of the sensor, place a check mark to the [Enable program switching through external input] check box and set the function of the input line.

Set the function of the input line

“Input Settings” (Page 6-26)

The bit to be set differs depending on the product numbers to be registered.

Product numbers to be registered

(Program numbers)

bit to be assigned to the input line

2 bit0

3 to 4 bit0/bit1

5 to 8 bit0/bit1/bit2

9 to 16 bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3

17 to 32 bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3/bit4

Setup exampleWhen 7 types of products are to be registered, bit0, bit1, and bit2 are assigned to arbitrary IN terminals. bit3 and bit4 are not assigned.

6




Using the program functions (changing over)

When switching the program in the main screen in [Run]

1 Start the run mode. “Starting an Operation” (Page 5-2)“Starting an Operation” (Page 5-2)

2 Select a program number that the product to be judged is registered.

Select the program


The program number can also be selected while confirming a master image with the [Detail] button (Page 6-11).

3 Start the run mode with the new program number by clicking the [OK] button.

For details of switching from the dedicated monitor, refer to the “IV Series User's Manual (Monitor)”.

When switching the program in the Program Details screen


2 Display the Program Details screen. “[File] menu” (Page 6-45)

3 Select a program that the product to be judged is registered, and click the [Change Program] button.

Select the program


4 Start the run mode with the new program number by clicking the [OK] button.

6




When switching the program by the external input


2 Select the program number to which the product to be judged is registered with the status of the input line.Change the input lines IN2 to IN6 which were assigned to bit0 to bit4 in the input settings (Page 6-26) to the following statuses and maintain the settings. Start the run mode with the new program number.

Program number

bit4(MSB) bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

(LSB)Program number

bit4(MSB) bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

(LSB)PROG00 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF PROG16 ON OFF OFF OFF OFFPROG01 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON PROG17 ON OFF OFF OFF ONPROG02 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF PROG18 ON OFF OFF ON OFFPROG03 OFF OFF OFF ON ON PROG19 ON OFF OFF ON ONPROG04 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF PROG20 ON OFF ON OFF OFFPROG05 OFF OFF ON OFF ON PROG21 ON OFF ON OFF ONPROG06 OFF OFF ON ON OFF PROG22 ON OFF ON ON OFFPROG07 OFF OFF ON ON ON PROG23 ON OFF ON ON ONPROG08 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF PROG24 ON ON OFF OFF OFFPROG09 OFF ON OFF OFF ON PROG25 ON ON OFF OFF ONPROG10 OFF ON OFF ON OFF PROG26 ON ON OFF ON OFFPROG11 OFF ON OFF ON ON PROG27 ON ON OFF ON ONPROG12 OFF ON ON OFF OFF PROG28 ON ON ON OFF OFFPROG13 OFF ON ON OFF ON PROG29 ON ON ON OFF ONPROG14 OFF ON ON ON OFF PROG30 ON ON ON ON OFFPROG15 OFF ON ON ON ON PROG31 ON ON ON ON ON

yWhen the polarity (Page 6-28) is [NPN] ON : The state shorted with 0 V line OFF : Open

yWhen the polarity (Page 6-28) is [PNP] ON : The state that voltage is applied OFF : Open

For details of the controlling method and the timing chart, refer to “Changing Over” (Page 8-7).

6




Displaying the Program Details screen

This section explains the Program Details screen displayed when the [Detail] button is clicked on the main screen of the IV-Navigator.

When the Program Details screen opens by clicking the [Detail] button on the main screen in [Run], only the [Change Program] button can be clicked.

1 Display the main screen in [Run] or [Program].


2 Click the [Detail] button.

The Program Details screen opens. The displayed items are as follows.

(7)

(1) (2) (3)

(4)

(5)

(8)

(6)

(9) (10)

(1) [Copy] buttonCopies a set program to another program number.

“Copying a program” (Page 6-12)

(2) [Import from File] buttonImports a program from the batch backup file.

“Importing a program” (Page 6-13)

(3) [Initialize] buttonInitializes the set items in the program and resets to the default.


(4) Thumbnail imagesDisplays a program number, program name, and thumbnail image.

(5) Program nameDisplays a program name of an magnified image.

(6) [Edit] buttonEdits a program name of the selected program.

“Editing a program name” (Page 6-12)

(7) Tool listDisplays a tool list which has been set in the selected program.Displays a frame of the tool window on the magnified image with a thick line by selecting the tool. Also, displays a frame of the search region in light blue.

(8) Image display screenMagnifies the selected thumbnail image.

(9) [Change Program] buttonSwitches a program to be used to the program of the selected thumbnail image.

“When switching the program in the Program Details screen” (Page 6-9)

(10) [Close] buttonThe system returns to the main screen in [Run] or [Program].

6




Editing a program nameEdits the program name of the selected program.


2 Display the Program Details screen. “Displaying the Program Details screen” (Page 6-11)

3 Select the program to change the program name and click the [Edit] button.

Select the program

The screen to edit the program name opens.

4 Input any name and click the [OK] button.

The system returns to the Program details screen.

If the display language (Page 6-49) is changed, the program name might be replaced and displayed as hyphens (-).

Copying a programCopies a set program to another program number. A new program can be created by reusing the settings which has been set.



3 Select the program to be copied and click the [Copy] button.

Select the program

4 Select the program of the copy destination and click the [OK] button.

Select the program

The copy source program is copied to the copy destination.

6




Importing a programImports one program from the batch backup file. A new program can be created by reusing the settings of the imported program.



3 Select the program to be copied and click the [Import from File] button

4 Click the button.

5 Select a batch backup file to be the importing source of a program and click the [Open] button.

6 From the program saved in the batch backup file, select a program to be the importing source.

7 Select a program of the importing destination and click the [OK] button.

The program of the import source will be imported to the importing destination.

6




Initializing a programInitializes settings in the program and resets to the default.



3 Select the program to be initialized and click the [Initialize] button.

Select the program



The system returns to the Program details screen.The deleted program will be [No Master Image].

6



Sensor's Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)


The sensor has a built-in memory for saving images used for judgment. According to the saving condition, it automatically saves the latest images. The saving conditions are as follows.

yNG Only (default value) ....Saves the images whose total status result was NG. yAll ......................................Saves all the images that were judged.

Loads the saved images into the PC and the images can be used for confirming the causes and tendency of the NG result.The numbers of images can be saved are as follows.

yColor type ................... 100 images yMonochrome type ....... 300 images

The number of images which can be saved when using the FTP client function are as follows. yColor type ................... 70 images yMonochrome type ....... 210 images

Since the memory of the sensor’s internal image history is volatile, all saved images are erased when the power is turned OFF.To save an image, select the [File] → [Batch Backup] from the menu bar, and then perform batch backup.

6




Displaying the Sensor's internal image history screenThis section explains how to display the Sensor’s internal image history screen.

There are two methods for displaying the Sensor’s internal image history screen.[Logging Settings] can be set only when it is selected on the main screen in [Program].

z� Displaying from the main screen in [Run]

1 Click the [Image Hist] button in the main screen in [Run].

The Logging pause confirmation screen opens.Select whether or not to pause.

When the operation is not pausing yThe added or overwritten history image will not be updated automatically. To update, click the [Refresh] button. yWhen the history image is erased by overwriting and updating in the sensor during display on the monitor, it may not be displayed again on the monitor.

2 Click the [OK] button.The Sensor’s internal image history screen opens.

z� Displaying from the main screen in [Program]

1 Click the [Image Hist] button in the main screen in [Program].


6




Loading and confirming the saved imagesDisplay the image history saved in the built-in memory of the sensor.

Use the simulator (Page 7-1) for confirmation of the image history saved in the batch backup file (*.iva).

1 Display the Sensor’s internal image history screen. “Displaying the Sensor’s internal image history screen” (Page 6-16)

(12)

(13)

(4)(3)(2)(1) (5)

(6)

(7)(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(1) FilterSelect the image history type to be displayed from [All]/[NG Only]/[OK Only].

(2) [Save All Images] buttonSaves all the image histories saved in the sensor to the individual file (*.bmp and *.ivp) or batch backup file (*.iva).

“Saving all the image histories individually” (Page 6-18)

“Backing up the image history in a batch” (Page 6-19)

To back up the images in a batch from the View screen, the saving target will be [Prog.+Image Hist.].

(3) [Refresh] buttonDisplayed if the [Continue Logging] is selected when the image history is to be displayed from the main screen in [Run].Clears the image history displayed on the IV-Navigator, and then acquires and displays the latest image history in the sensor.

(4) [Delete All] buttonClears the image histories saved in the sensor.

“Clearing the saved images” (Page 6-19)

(5) [Logging Settings] buttonSets the logging condition (storage condition) for the image history.

“Changing the logging conditions of the image history” (Page 6-20)

(6) Thumbnail imagesDisplays the number of triggers, total status result, and thumbnail image.

For details of the number of triggers, refer to “Displaying the statistical information” (Page 5-10).

6




(7) Trigger numberDisplays the number of triggers of the magnified history image.

In the following cases, characters of the trigger number are displayed in gray.

y Images which the tool settings was changed after image history saving yWhen Tool Auto Tuning has been performed

Moreover, if [Process 1] / [Process 2] / [Process] is selected for Tool View (Page 5-7), only the tool window is displayed and the process contents are not displayed.

(8) Total status resultDisplays the total status result of the magnified history image in OK or NG.

(9) Magnified display screenMagnifies the selected thumbnail image.

“Basic Operation for Tools” (Page 3-11)

(10) Program numberDisplays a program number of the Sensor's internal image history currently displayed.

(11) [Inspection Tool Auto Tuning] buttonPerforms a Tool Auto Tuning based on the magnified history image.


(12) Tool listDisplays a tool list which has been set in the program of the history image. The tool will be displayed on the image according to the settings of the tool display (Page 5-7) by selecting the tool.

(13) [Close] buttonThe system returns to the main screen in [Run] or [Program].

Saving all the image histories individually

Saves all the image histories saved in the sensor to the individual file (*.bmp and *.ivp).

1 Display the Sensor’s internal image history screen.

“Displaying the Sensor’s internal image history screen” (Page 6-16)

2 Click the [Save All Images] button and select the [Save all images one by one (*.bmp,*ivp)].

The Browse For Folder screen opens.

3 Specify an arbitrary saving destination and click the [OK] button.

The save completion message appears.

Saves all files at the same time. To save individually, save it with the [Save Image] button of the image tool bar (Page 3-11).


The system returns to the Sensor's internal image history screen.

6




Backing up the image history in a batchSaves all the image histories saved in the sensor to the batch backup file (*.iva).



2 Click the [Save All Images] button and select the [Batch Backup (*.iva)].

The Batch Backup screen opens.

3 Click the [Go] button.

The save as screen opens.

4 Click the [Save] button.

Change a saving destination of the file and file name as needed.

The backup completion message appears.

5 Click the [OK] button.The system returns to the Sensor's internal image history screen.

Clearing the saved imagesClears the image histories saved in the sensor.



2 Click the [Delete All] button.


3 Click the [Yes] button.The image history will be cleared.

4 Click the [Close] button.

The system returns to the main screen in [Run] or [Program].

6




Changing the logging conditions of the image history

Sets the logging condition (storage condition) for the image history.


Display the Sensor's internal image history screen from the main screen in [Program].[Logging Settings] can be set only when it is selected on the main screen in [Program].


2 Click the [Logging Settings] button.

3 Select a logging condition.

yAll ..................... Saves all the images to the image history regardless of the status result.

yNG Only ........... Only saves the images whose status result is NG to the image history.

4 Click the [OK] button.The system returns to the Sensor's internal image history screen.

6



Saving the Sensor Settings and Images


Backs up the data saved in the sensor, transfers the setting data, and captures an image.

Saving the sensor settings or the image history

Backing up in a batchBacks up the data saved in the sensor to the PC in a batch.When multiple sensors are to be used, the settings can be copied based on the batch backup data.

y It is recommended to perform a batch backup of the data saved in the sensor in case of malfunction of the product. yThe saving time increases when this is performed in [Program]. Execution while in the [Run] status is recommended.



2 Click the [Advanced] button.

3 Select the [Backup] tab and click the [Batch Backup] button.

[Backup] tab

The Batch Backup screen opens.

4 Click the [Go] button.

yTo back up all the images of the image history in addition to the sensor settings (Sensor Setup (Settings Navigator) and extended functions of all programs), place a check mark to the [Save Image History] check box. yWhen the image history has been saved in [Run], the image being the saving object may be updated and deleted during the batch backup. A deleted image is not saved. Because of this, saving in [Program] is recommended.

The save as screen opens.


Change a saving destination of the file and file name as needed.

The backup completion message appears.



6




Saving images and screens displayed on the IV-Navigator individually

In the screen which displays the [Save Image] button, an image displayed on the IV-Navigator can be individually saved to the PC. The ivp format file which can be used for a master image registration or Tool Auto Tuning will also be saved at the same time.The IV-Navigator’s screen will also be saved at the same time (screenshot).The screens which displays the [Save Image] button are as follows.

yMain screen in [Run] yMain screen in [Program] ySettings Navigator y Limit Adjustment y Inspection Tool Auto Tuning yProgram Details ySensor’s internal image history

This section explains the procedure for saving images by using an example of the main screen in [Run].

z� Saving procedure

1 Click the [Save Image] button.

The [Image saved] message appears, and the bmp and ivp format files will be saved to the saving destination.

z� Confirming the saving destination of an image

1 Click the [Show saved image file location] button.

The folder which has been set to the saving destination opens.

z� Changing the saving destination of an image

1 Click the [▼] button and select the [Change saved image file location].

The Browse For Folder screen opens.

2 Specify an arbitrary saving destination and click the [OK] button.

6




Transferring the backed up settings to the sensor

Transfers the setting data (batch backup file) saved in the PC to the sensor.

yOperations cannot be cancelled during transmission of the settings data. y It is recommended to batch back up the data saved in the sensor beforehand.

“Saving the sensor settings or the image history” (Page 6-21)

yThe image data in the image history will not be transferred. yThe settings file of a different model of the sensor cannot be transferred. yThe settings data of auto focus type and manual focus type can be transferred mutually. However, when the setting data of a manual focus type are transferred to an auto focus type, the focusing position will be converted to the default value. yWhen directly connecting the sensor to the PC, the setting file of the sensor with the FTP client function or a field network enabled cannot be transferred. yWhen the FTP client function or field network function is enabled, the setting data cannot be transferred to the sensor during running.




3 Select the [Backup] tab and click the [Transfer Program Settings] button.

[Backup] tab


4 Click the [Yes] button.The screen to select the batch backup file opens.

5 Select a batch backup file to be transferred, and click the [Open] button.

The Transfer Program Settings screen opens.

6




6 Confirm the information of the setting file to be transferred and click the [Send] button.

After transferring files have been completed, the transfer completion message appears.

y If you would like to transfer the I/O polarity (NPN/PNP) and the network settings also, check the [Send the settings below.] check box of the Setting Transfer Options.

When the [Send the settings below.] check box is checked, pay attention to the following items.

yWhen the FTP client function is set to [Enable], the image history will be cleared. yThe number of images which can be saved to the image history when using the FTP client function are as follows.- Color type ....................70 images- Monochrome type ........210 images yWhen a file transfer is completed, the connection with the sensor is terminated and the system returns to the Activation Menu screen. yWhen the PROFINET communication is being used, the sensor restarts.

yWhen the protocol setting has been changed, the connection is terminated and the sensor restarts.

7 Click the [OK] button.The system returns to the Advanced Sensor Settings screen.

When a file was transferred while the [Send the settings below.] check box of the Setting Transfer Options is checked , the connection with the sensor is terminated and the system returns to the Activation Menu screen.

6




Folder composition and file naming rules

Data type Storage Rule Description Reference page

Batch Backup

Storage folder

The arbitrary folder can be specified. The default value of the storage folder is as follows.For Windows 7

C:\Users\(Login user name)\Documents\IV-Navigator

For Windows XPC:\Documents and Settings\ (Login user name)\My Documents\ IV-Navigator

Saves all the settings in the sensor in a batch.All the images of the image history can also be saved with settings.

6-21

File name YYYYMMDD_hhmmss*1, *2

Extension iva

Save Image

Storage folder

An arbitrary folder can be specified. The default value of the storage folder is as follows.For Windows 7C:\Users\(Login user name)\Documents\IV-Navigator\ImageFor Windows XPC:\Documents and Settings\(Login user name)\My Documents\IV-Navigator\Image

Saves the bmp format file of the taken image and the ivp format file which can be used for a master image registration or Tool Auto Tuning at the same time.The IV-Navigator’s screen will also be saved at the same time (screenshot).

6-22

File name YYYYMMDD_hhmmss*1, *3

YYYYMMDD_hhmmss_screen*1, *4

Extensionbmp

ivp

IV Series Auto Tuning registration

data file

Storage folder

An arbitrary folder can be specified. The default value of the storage folder is as follows.For Windows 7C:\Users\(Login user name)\Documents\IV-NavigatorFor Windows XPC:\Documents and Settings\ (Login user name)\My Documents\ IV-Navigator

Saves all the images registered in the Tool Auto Tuning.

5-27

File name PROG** (** indicates the program number)

Extension ivm

*1 YYYY : Year, MM : Month, DD : Day, hh : Hour, mm : Minute, ss : Second*2 Changes to the arbitrary file name and saves it.*3 Taken image file. Saved in bmp format and ivp format.*4 Screenshot file of the IV-Navigator. Saved in bmp format.

6



Setting the Input and Output Information of the Sensor

This section explains the I/O Settings screen displayed when the [I/O Settings] button on the main screen is clicked.

Only when the [I/O Settings] button is clicked in the main screen in [Program], settings for inputting and outputting of the sensor can be changed.

Input SettingsSets the input settings for the sensor.

1 Click the [I/O Settings] button in the main screen in [Program].

The I/O Settings screen opens.

2 Select the [Input] tab and set the input settings of the sensor.

zz Input AssignmentIN1Sets the detection timing of the trigger input for IN1 input line.

yExt. Trigger RisingSets the trigger input to the rising edge of the external trigger. yExt. Trigger FallingSets the trigger input to the falling edge of the external trigger.

IN2 to IN6Sets the roles for input line IN2 to IN6.

yOFFIgnores the input.

yProgram bit0 to bit4Specifies the number for switching the programs.

“Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)” (Page 6-6) yClear ErrorSets the error output clearance.

yExt. Master SaveSets the master image registration from the external input.

zz OptionWrite ROM when using Ext. Master SaveIf the check box is checked , the system writes the data to the ROM of the sensor when the master registration is performed with the external input or the field network.

“Registering the Master Image” (Page 8-8)

Enable program switching through external inputIf the check box is checked , the program number can be switched with the external input.

“Preparing the program functions” (Page 6-7)

To switch the program number with the external input, any of the program bit0 to bit4 must be assigned to any of the IN2 to IN6 of the [Input Assignment].

3 After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button.The system returns to the main screen in [Program].


6




Output SettingsSets the output settings for the sensor.



2 Select the [Output] tab and set the output settings of the sensor.

zz Output TypeOUT1 to OUT4Specifies the output format of the output line with [N.O] or [N.C].

zz Output TypeSelect an output mode.

“Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 8-6)

[Latching]Outputs the result along with the judgment condition of the sensor.

[One-Shot]Sets the One-Shot ON Time and ON-Delay Time in which output the status output with one-shot.

yOne-Shot ON TimeSpecifies the flash width of the one-shot within 1 to 1000 ms.

yON-Delay TimeSpecify the ON-Delay Time of the one-shot flash within 0 to 5000 ms.


6




I/O MonitorWhether or not the I/O line for control is correctly wired can be confirmed.



2 Select the [I/O Monitor] tab and set the output settings of the sensor.

zz Input MonitorDisplays the input status of external input in real time. Whether or not the ON/OFF output from the PLC is being correctly input can be confirmed.

zz Output TestClick the [ON] button to turn ON each OUT output. Click the [OFF] button to turn them OFF.Confirm that the PLC or the display lamp is correctly output.


I/O PolaritySwitches the polarity of the sensor.



2 Click the [I/O Polarity] button.

The Polarity screen opens.

3 Select the [NPN] or [PNP] under Polarity.

yNPNOutput circuit ....NPN open collectorInput circuit .......No-voltage input yPNPOutput circuit ....PNP open collectorInput circuit .......Voltage input “Cables” (Page 2-8)“Cables” (Page 2-8)

6




4 Click the [OK] button.If the polarity is switched, the confirmation dialog appears.

5 Click the [Yes] button.The system returns to the I/O Settings screen.

6 Click the [OK] button.The system returns to the main screen in [Program].

6



Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor

Advanced settings for the sensorThis section explains the Advanced Sensor Settings screen displayed when the [Advanced] button on the main screen is clicked.

Only when the [Advanced] button is clicked in the main screen in [Program], the advanced settings of the sensor can be changed.

[Environmental] tab

zz Device SettingsSets the sensor name and changes the network settings.

“Environmental” (Page 6-31)

zz Field NetworkSets the field network settings.

“Field Network” (Page 6-33)

zz SecuritySets the password lock setting.

“Security” (Page 6-34)

zz Auto Focus Adjustment PositionSets whether or not to make the adjusting position for auto focus common to all programs.

“Auto Focus Adjustment Position (auto focus type only)” (Page 6-35)

[FTP] tabAutomatically transfers the image data and status result information saved in the sensor memory to an FTP server.

“FTP” (Page 6-36)

[Setup Adjustment] tab

zz Tilt CorrectionPerforms a tilt correction of the images displayed on the screen.


zz White Balance (for color type only)Adjusts the white balance of the image displayed on the screen.


zz Image Display DirectionRotates the image displayed on the screen 180°.

“Image display direction” (Page 6-43)


6




[Backup] tab

zz Batch BackupSaves the settings data or image history saved in the sensor to the PC.

“Batch Backup” (Page 6-44)

zz Transfer Program SettingsTransfers the settings data saved in the PC to the sensor.

“Transfer Program Settings” (Page 6-44)

[Initialize/Update] tab

zz Initialize SensorInitializes the sensor settings.

“Initialize Sensor” (Page 6-44)

zz Update SensorUpdates the operation software of the sensor.

“Update Sensor” (Page 6-44)

[Sensor Information] tabDisplays the information set in the sensor.The model, version, serial number, MAC address, IP address, and device name can be confirmed.

EnvironmentalSets a sensor name and changes the network settings.

Setting a device name

1 Display the Advanced Sensor Settings screen.

“Advanced settings for the sensor” (Page 6-30)

2 Select the [Environmental] tab.

3 Set the environment settings of the sensor.

zz Device NameDisplays the sensor name.To change the sensor name, click the [Change Device Name] button and input an arbitrary name in the Device Name screen.The sensor can be arbitrary named and controlled. Input an arbitrary name.

y If the display language (Page 6-49) is changed, the program name might be replaced and displayed as hyphens (-). y To use the PROFINET function, use only “a - z”, “0-9”, “-”, and “.”. For the setting details, refer to

“IV Series User’s Manual (Field Network)”. yWhen you changed the device name while the PROFINET communication is being used, the sensor restarts.

zz MAC AddressDisplays the MAC address of the sensor. The MAC address cannot be changed.


6




Changing the network settings

yThe settings are not required for the direct connection. yHow to use the network setting

yThe IP address of the sensor connected to the network can be changed. yThe network settings of the sensor can be initialized. The settings can also be initialized using the IP reset switch (Page A-35) of the sensor. yTo set the IP address before connecting to the network, it can be set by connecting the PC and sensor directly. yWhen you changed the device name while the PROFINET communication is being used, the sensor restarts.

1 Displays the Advanced Sensor Settings screen.


2 Select the [Environmental] tab and click [Change Network Settings] button.

Network Settings screen opens.

3 Sets the network address of the sensor.

zz IP address/Subnet mask/Default gateway/Port numberDisplays the address for each network and port number.Set the desired address and port number, and click the [OK] button.

zz [Reset] buttonClicking the [Reset] button resets the IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway/Port Number.“Empty” will be displayed after the reset.

By clicking the [OK] button, the confirmation dialog appears.

By clicking the [Yes] button, the network settings will be reset and the system returns to the Activation Menu screen.


6




Field NetworkCommunicates with a PLC via a field network and the status result, etc., can be input to the PLC as communication data.For the communication protocol, EtherNet/IP and PROFINET can be selected.

Host device such as PLC(EtherNet/IP, PROFINET master unit)

EtherNet/IP, PROFINET adapterSensor

yTo use the field network function, select [Network Connection] for the connection setting of the sensor. During the direct connection, the setting item is shaded and cannot be selected. yWhen the protocol setting has been changed, the connection is terminated and the sensor restarts. yFor the details of the field network function, refer to “IV Series User’s Manual (Field Network)”.



2 Select the [Environmental] tab and click the [Settings] button.

The Field Network setting screen opens.

3 Set field network settings.

zz ProtocolSelect a protocol for the field network.

zz Handshake ControlTo enable the handshake control, check this check box .

When the protocol is set as [Disable], this setting item is shaded and cannot be selected.


6




SecuritySets the password to the sensor to prevent the incorrect operation.

zz Enable the password lockOpen the main screen in [Run]. The “Lock Enabled” message appears in the lower right of the screen.

In the main screen in [Run], the following operation can be locked.

yTransition to the main screen in [Program] yProgram switching y [Manual Trigger] yReset statistics y Logging stop at the time of image history display yClearing the image history yTransfer Program Settings

If the lock is canceled, the operation will be locked again by performing “Click the status bar” or “Passage of 60 sec without performing any of the above locked operations”.

zz Disable the password lockInput the password when the input dialog for the password to disable appears.

The “Lock Disabled” message appears in the lower right of the screen.

If you cancel the password lock and go to the main screen in [Program], the password lock will be canceled until you go to the main screen in [Run].

z� Setting the password lock




3 Place a check mark to the [Password Lock] check box.

4 Input an arbitrary password into the [Password] and [Enter password for confirmation].

yDefault: None (blank) yBy clicking the [Undo] button, the setting returns to the state before setting the new password.


To disable the password lock, remove the check mark from the [Password Lock] check box by step 3.

6




Auto Focus Adjustment Position (auto focus type only)

Sets whether or not to make the adjusting position for the auto focus common to all programs.




3 Set the auto focus adjustment position.

zz IndividualSets the focus adjustment position in each program. Select this when the focus position is different for each target registered in each program. Re-adjusts the focusing position when the program number is switched. Switching programs takes longer in this option due to the time needed to adjust the focusing position.

zz CommonSets the focus adjustment position common to all programs. Select this when the focus position of the target registered in each program is common. The program can be quickly switched because re-adjustment of the focusing position will not be performed when the program number is switched.

The duration for the operation count of the focusing function (program switch count) is 100,000 times. If the focusing position does not need to be changed in each program, set [Auto Focus Adjustment Position] to [Common] to extend its duration.

When the auto focus adjustment position is set to [Common], a message recommending re-registration of the master image appears.Re-register the master image after the setting is completed.



6




FTPAutomatically transfers the image data and status result information saved in the sensor memory to an FTP server.

FTP server

LAN

FTP client

Data transfer via FTP

y To use the FTP client function, select [Network Connection] for the connection setting of the sensor. During the direct connection, the setting item is shaded and cannot be selected. y If data are not transferred properly with the FTP client function, refer to “Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable” (Page A-33).



2 Select the [FTP] tab and enable the FTP client setting.

yWhen the FTP client function is set to [Enable], the image history will be cleared. yThe number of images which can be saved to the image history when using the FTP client function are as follows.

yColor type ................ 70 images yMonochrome type .... 210 images

3 Click the [FTP Destination] button.

The FTP Destination Settings screen opens.

4 Set the network address of the FTP server.

zz IP AddressDisplays the IP address of the FTP server.Set an arbitrary address.

zz Port NumberDisplays the port number.Set an arbitrary port number.

zz User NameInput the user name for logging in to the FTP server. Set an arbitrary user name.

Default: None (blank)

zz PasswordInput the password for logging in to the FTP server. Set an arbitrary password.

Default: None (blank)

zz Passive ModeTo use the passive mode, select [Enable].

6




5 Click the [Connection Test] button to test the connection with the connection destination.The connection test is performed and the result window opens.

If [Successfully connected.] is displayed, the setting is completed.

When the test is executed, the connection with the FTP server, folder creating at the transfer destination, and data file creating are tested.

When the connection cannot be done properly, deal with the problem in accordance with the cause of connect failure displayed on the result window.

“Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable” (Page A-33)

6 Click the [OK] button.The system returns to the Advanced Sensor Settings screen.

7 Set the file transfer conditions.

zz Transfer ConditionSelects the transfer condition of image data.

yAll ..................... Transfers all the images that are judged.

yNG Only ........... Transfers all the images whose total status results are NG.

yWhen the transfer condition is set to [All], adjust the processing time so that all the images can be transferred. yWhen the transfer could not be done on time, the data are saved in the internal buffer. The internal buffer can save images up to 30 images. y Image data are transferred in the sequence that they have been saved to the internal buffer. yWhen the remaining capacity of the internal buffer is insufficient, an FTP error occurs and the image data transfer fails. yWhen the transfer condition is set to [All], confirm that there is sufficient storage area on the FTP server.

zz File FormatSelects the file saving format for image data.

y IVPTransfers the image data as the format which can be opened by IV-Navigator. Operation results can be confirmed in the simulator function by using the transferred image data. Moreover, the image data can be converted to the BMP format by using the IVP-Converter. yBMPTransfers the image data as the format which can be opened by other applications.

zz Transfer Judgment ResultsTo transfer judgement results simultaneously with the image data, select [Enable].Judgement results are transferred as a tab delimited text.

The example for displaying the saved results file with Microsoft Excel is as follows.

6




zz FTP ErrorTo turn ON the error output function for when a file transfer failed, select [Enable].

When this item is set to [Enable], the followings occur if a file transfer fails.

yThe following error messages are displayed in response to the causes of failure.- FTP Connection Error- FTP Transfer Error (Transfer Failed)- FTP Transfer Error (Insufficient Data Buffer)

“Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable” (Page A-33) yThe error output function turns ON. yThe indicator light of the sensor blinks in red. y If “FTP Transfer Error” has occurred while the sensor is running, the error condition will continue until the error is cleared.

8 Specify the transfer destination folder of FTP server.

zz FolderSpecifies the transfer destination folder of FTP server.Set an arbitrary folder name.

y Input is not necessary if the image data is to be transferred to the root folder. yTo specify a subfolder, break it with "/" (one-byte slash). y If the specified folder does not exist, a new folder will be created.

Default: None (blank). Up to 16 characters can be set.

y “/” (one-byte slash), “.” (one-byte point) and “ ” (one-byte space) cannot be used as the first nor last letter of the folder name. y “/” (one-byte slash) cannot be used multiple times in a row.

6




zz File NameSets the file name of the transfer files.

yDefault: None (black). Up to 16 characters can be set. yThe transfer file naming rule is as follows.

xxxxxx_AAAAA_BB_CC.DDD y xxxxxx ...... The file name which has been

set (up to 16 characters) yAAAAA ..... A sequence number for each

FTP transfer (5 digits which zero suppression is used). Promptly after startup, “00000” is displayed.

yBB ............ The program number (2 digits which zero suppression is used)

yCC ............ The total status result (“OK” or “NG”)

yDDD ......... The extension (“ivp” or “bmp”)

y If there is a file with the same name at the transfer destination, that file will be overwritten. When you transfer image data from multiple IV series, specify different transfer destinations so that the image data are not overwritten accidentally. y If the transfer destination folder is read only or is opened, an FTP error will occur and the image data transfer will fail.

zz Index Upper LimitSets the upper limit of the number of image data which can be transferred to the transfer destination folder.

When the file index quantity has reached the index upper limit, as follows.

yWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to [ON], the folder of the next sequence number is created. yWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to [OFF], the file index quantity returns to “0”.

zz Create SubfolderTo create subfolders under the transfer destination folder, select [Enable].

yThe subfolder naming rule is as follows.IVxxxxx(xxxxx is a sequence number created every time the sensor is restarted or the FTP settings are changed.)

yWhen subfolders were created, the folder structure is as follows.

Root folder

Transfer destination folder

0000

0001

0002

Subfolder

When the file index quantity reaches the index upper limit, the folder of the next sequence number is created.

yThe default of subfolders is “IV00001”. yThe upper limit is “IV99999”. When the upper limit has been reached, the count continues by returning to “IV00000”. yThe subfolder name cannot be initialized. yThe upper limit of the count number of folders in the subfolder is “9999”. When the number is over the upper limit, the transfer stops.

9 After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button.The system returns tothe main screen in [Program].

6




Tilt CorrectionIf the sensor cannot be installed in the front of the target due to the installation restrictions of the sensor and target and/or to prevent a shine on the target’s surface, the image of the target may be trapezoidally distorted.The tilt correction corrects these images and displays them without distortion.

Top view

Lateral view


After tilt correction (vertical)

Indicator light

Target

Target

Top view

Lateral view


After tilt correction (horizontal)

Indicator lightTarget

Target

Vertical correction Horizontal correction

6




1 Displays the Advanced Sensor Settings screen.


2 Select the [Setup Adjustment] tab.

3 Place a check mark to the [Enable Tilt Correction] check box and click the [Set] button.

The Tilt Correction screen opens.

4 Image a target to be a reference such as a piece of paper printed with square grids.

5 Perform the tilt correction.

zz VerticalPerforms a tilt correction in the vertical direction.Slide the slider to correct the display of the vertical direction of the taken image.

<Image of vertical correction>Before correction Before correctionAfter correction

zz HorizontalPerforms a tilt correction in the horizontal direction.Slide the slider to correct display of the horizontal direction of the taken image.

<Image of horizontal correction>Before correction Before correctionAfter correction

y If the quality of the displayed taken image is poor, click the [Image Settings] tab to adjust the taken image.The following adjustments can be made.

“Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11)“Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11) “Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13)“Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13) “Lighting” (Page 4-19)“Lighting” (Page 4-19)

yMake sure the target fits within the imaging area after tilt correction. The imaging area after the tilt correction may have become narrower than before the correction by the tilt correction.

6 After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button.The system returns to the Advanced Sensor Settings screen.


Re-register the master image if the tilt correction is performed.


6




White Balance (for color type only)Adjusts the white balance (color tint) of the built-in camera of the sensor.

The white balance is adjusted by default.




3 Place a check mark to the [Enable White Balance Adjustment] check box and click the [Set] button.

The White Balance screen opens.

If the displayed taken image is not suitable for adjusting the white balance, click the [Image Settings] tab to adjust the taken image. Also, if the white balance has been set to [Enable], the image will be displayed with the white balance adjustment applied.The following adjustments can be performed.

y “Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11)“Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11) y “Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13)“Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13) y “Lighting” (Page 4-19)“Lighting” (Page 4-19)

4 Image a white-colored target and click the [Go] button.

After the white balance adjustment is completed, the message “White balance adjustment has been completed.” appears.

5 Click the [OK] button.The system returns to the White balance window.


After performing a white balance adjustment, a message prompting you to re-register the master image appears.Re-register the master image after the setting is completed.




6




Image display directionThe target to be displayed on the screen may be rotated 180° and displayed due to the installation restrictions of the sensor and target. Change the display direction of an image and the image rotated 180° can be displayed.

Before rotating 180° After rotating 180°

Indicator light

Target




3 Select [Rotate 180°].


yAfter performing a rotate 180° correction, a message prompting you to re-register the master image appears.Re-register the master image after the setting is completed.


y If a tilt correction (Page 6-40) has also been performed, confirm the tilt correction settings after a rotate 180° correction.



6




Batch BackupBacks up the data saved in the sensor to the PC in a batch.When multiple sensors are to be used, the settings can be copied based on the batch backup data.For details of procedures, refer to “Backing up in a batch” (Page 6-21).

Transfer Program SettingsTransfers the settings data (batch backup file) saved in the PC to the sensor.For details of procedures, refer to “Transferring the backed up settings to the sensor” (Page 6-23).

Initialize SensorInitializes the information set in the sensor and sets to the factory default.For details of procedures, refer to “Initializing the sensor” (Page 3-10).

The following settings will not be initialized. yPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP) (Page 6-28) yNetwork Settings (Page 6-32)

Update SensorUpdates the operation software of the sensor.For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage.URL : http://www.keyence.com/

Sensor InformationDisplays the information set in the sensor.The model, version, serial number, MAC address, IP address, and device name can be confirmed.

6



Operating from the menu bar

[File] menu

Batch BackupBacks up the data saved in the sensor to the PC in a batch.For details of procedures, refer to “Backing up in a batch” (Page 6-21).

Transfer Program SettingsTransfers the settings data (batch backup file) saved in the PC to the sensor.For details of procedures, refer to “Transferring the backed up settings to the sensor” (Page 6-23).

Export

z� Program Settings ListOutputs the information set in the sensor in the Tab delimited text.


2 Select [File] → [Export] → [Program Settings List] from the menu bar.The Program Settings List screen opens.


Change the saving destination of the file and file name as needed.



The system returns to the main screen in [Run].

The example for displaying the saved Program settings list file with Microsoft Excel is as follows.

z� Statistics/Histogram DataOutputs the statistical information and histogram information in the tab-delimited text.

1 Select [File] → [Export] → [Statistics/Histogram Data] from the menu bar.The Statistics/Histogram Data screen opens.





6





The system returns to the main screen in [Run] or [Program].

The example for displaying the saved Statistics/histogram data file with Microsoft Excel is as follows.

ExitExits the IV-Navigator.

1 Select [File] → [Exit] from the menu bar.The IV-Navigator exits.

[View] menu

StatisticsSwitches the statistical information to show/hide.For details of procedures, refer to “Displaying the statistical information” (Page 5-10)..

Tool DataSwitches the tool data to show/hide.For details of procedures, refer to “Displaying the tool information” (Page 5-12)..6




[Sensor] menu

DisconnectDisconnects the connection between the sensor and PC, and displays the connection menu screen.

1 Select [Sensor] → [Disconnect] from the menu bar.The system returns to the Activation Menu screen.

Reset StatisticsResets the statistical information and histograms.

1 Display the main screen in [Run].

2 Select [Sensor] → [Reset Statistics] from the menu bar.The confirmation dialog appears.

3 Click the [Yes] button.The statistical information and histograms will be reset.

Initialize SensorInitializes the information set in the sensor and set to the factory default.For details of procedures, refer to “Initializing the sensor” (Page 3-10).

Sensor UpdateUpdates the operation software of the sensor.For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage.URL : http://www.keyence.com/

[Image] menu

Zoom

z� Zoom OutReduces the image displayed on the IV-Navigator.Select [Image] → [Zoom] → [Enlarge(Zoom Out)] from the menu bar. The image will be reduced per selecting.

Minimum of 100% can be reduced.

z� Zoom InMagnifies the image displayed on the IV-Navigator.Select [Image] → [Zoom] → [Enlarge(Zoom In)] from the menu bar. The image will be magnified per selecting.

Up to 500% can be magnified.

z� Fit to WindowFits the image displayed on the IV-Navigator to the screen size and displays it.Select [Image] → [Zoom] → [Fit to Window] from the menu bar.

Tool Display OptionsSwitches the display method of the tool.Select [Image] → [Tool Display Options] from the menu bar and select an arbitrary display method.Selectable display methods are as follows.

zz For color typeOff/Window/Process 1/Process 2

zz For monochrome typeOff/Window/Process/Process 1/Process 2

For details of each display method, refer to “Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7)..

6




Manual TriggerIssues a trigger one time in each time selecting [Image] → [Manual Trigger] from the menu bar. This button is used when the external trigger cannot be input.Enabled only when the external trigger is being set.

Capture

z� Save ImageSaves the bmp format file of the taken image and the ivp format file which can be used for a master image registration or Tool Auto Tuning at the same time.The IV-Navigator’s screen will also be saved at the same time (screenshot).Select [Image] → [Capture] → [Save Image] from the menu bar.

z� Show saved image file locationOpens the saving destination folder of the captured image.Select [Image] → [Capture] → [Show saved image file location] from the menu bar.

z� Change saved image file locationOpens the reference screen of a folder and changes a saving destination of the captured image.

1 Select [Image] → [Capture] → [Change saved image file location] from the menu bar.

2 In the reference screen of a folder, select an arbitrary folder and click the [OK] button.

[Setting] menu

Manual trigger buttonWhen an external trigger is being set, select it to show/hide the [Manual Trigger] button.Select [Setting] → [Manual Trigger Button] from the menu bar and select the [Show]/[Hide].

When an internal trigger is being set, the Manual trigger button will not be displayed.

Image while RunningSelect it to show/hide the [Image while Running]. If it is set to hide, you can stop updating images and update the status result faster.Select [Setting] → [Image while Running] from the menu bar and select the [Show]/[Hide].

6




LanguageSwitches the display language of the IV-Navigator.Selectable languages are as follows.

Japanese / English / German / Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional) / Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean

1 Select [Setting] → [Language] from the menu bar and select an arbitrary language.The confirmation dialog appears.


3 Exits the IV-Navigator. “Exit” (Page 6-46)

4 Start the IV-Navigator again.The display language of the IV-Navigator will be switched to the language selected in step 1.

Regarding the display of the characters in device names (Page 6-31) and program names (Page 6-11)

yCharacters which cannot be display with the language after change are replaced and displayed as hyphens (-). y If the device or program name has not been changed after the language change, it will be displayed as they were when the language is changed back. y If the device or program name has been changed after the language change, it will remain replaced by hyphens (-) and the former information will be erased when the language is changed back.

[Window] menu

Program DetailsDisplays the Program Details screen.Select [Window] → [Program Details] from the menu bar.For details of the Program Details screen, refer to “Things can be performed with the program functions” (Page 6-6).

Sensor’s Internal Image HistoryDisplays the Sensor’s internal Image history screen.Select [Window] → [Sensor’s Internal Image History] from the menu bar.For details of the Sensor's internal image history screen, refer to “Sensor’s Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 6-15).

I/O SettingsDisplays the I/O Settings screen.Select [Window] → [I/O Settings] from the menu bar.For details of the I/O Settings screen, refer to “Setting the Input and Output Information of the Sensor” (Page 6-26).

Advanced Sensor SettingsDisplays the Advanced Sensor Settings screen.Select [Window] → [Advanced Sensor Settings] from the menu bar.For details of the Advanced Sensor Settings screen, refer to “Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor” (Page 6-30).

6




[Help] menu

User's ManualOpens the User's Manual (PDF format) of the selected language.Select [Help] → [User's Manual] from the menu bar.

yThe User's Manual (PDF format) can also be opened by pressing the <F1> key. yWhen the [Help] menu does not exit on the menu bar such as in the Program Details screen, Sensor Setup screen (Settings Navigator), etc, open the User's Manual by pressing the <F1> key.

Version informationDisplays the version information of the IV-Navigator.Select [Help] → [About] from the menu bar.

6



Converting IVP Data to BMP Data Using the IVP-Converter

IVP-Converter is a software for transferring image data in IVP format, which have been saved individually in the image history or saved by the FTP client function, to BMP format.The files operating method is generally the same as the explorer operating method in the Windows standard.

Installing the IVP-ConverterWhen you install the IV-Navigator on the PC, the OVP-Converter is installed simultaneously.Therefore, there is no need to install the IVP-Converter separately.

yFor the details of the IV-Navigator installing procedure, refer to “Installing the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)” (Page 2-14). yWhen you install the IV-Navigator, The shortcut icon of the IVP-Converter is also created on the PC desktop.

Starting up the IVP-Converter

1 Double-click the [IVP-Converter] icon on the desktop.

The IVP-Converter starts.

Main screen of the IVP ConverterThis section explains the main screen of the IVP-Converter.

(2)

(3)

(1)

(4) (5) (6)

(1) Conversion source folderSpecifies the folder where the IVP data you would like to convert are to be stored.

(2) [...] buttonOpens the folder to specify the conversion source folder.

(3) [Convert] buttonConverts all of the IVP data that are stored in the folder specified at the Conversion source folder and its subfolders to BMP data.

(4) [About] buttonDisplays the About IVP-Converter screen.

(5) [Language] buttonDisplays the language selecting screen. You can select an arbitrary language to switch the display language.

(6) [Close] buttonExits the IVP-Convertor.


6




Converting IVP data to BMP dataSaves IVP data as BMP data, which can be opened in other applications.

1 Click the [...] button and specify the folder where the IVP data you would like to convert are to be stored.

All of the IVP data that are stored in the specified folder and its subfolders are the conversion targets.

2 Click the [Convert] button to execute the BMP conversion.

BMP data are saved in the conversion source folder.

yThe BMP data are saved in the same folder as the pre-converted IVP. yDuring the conversion, the following screen is displayed and the total amount of IVP data and conversion progress can be confirmed.

y If there are BMP data with the same names, they will be over written. yUp to 100,000 files of IVP data can be converted at a time.

6


7-1- IV Series User’s Manual (PC Software) -

This chapter explains the functions and operations of the Simulator.

Simulator ............................................................7-2Basic Operation of Simulator ...........................7-3Names and Functions of the Screen ...............7-6Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation) ................................7-8IV Sensor Simulation.......................................7-14Operating from the menu bar .........................7-18

7

Simulator

7

Simulator

7-2 - IV Series User’s Manual (PC Software) -

Simulator

Simulator is the function for checking/changing the program settings with IV-Navigator without a connected sensor, based on the batch backup file (*.iva), and for performing an “IV Sensor Simulation” based on the history images. It is also possible to transfer the data to the sensor and to perform operation again after changing the setting data with the Simulator.

(1) Operate by using the sensor(Save the image history)

(3) Setting changes (4) Confirm the operation status

(5) Transfers the batch backup file (*.iva) to the sensor

(2) Saves the batch backup file (*.iva) from the sensor

Simulator

Three main operations which can be performed with the Simulator function are as follows.

z� Sensor Setup SimulationWith no sensor connected, it is possible to edit and save the tool settings etc. based on the program settings saved in the batch backup file (*.iva).

The screen to be displayed is the same as in the Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup). However, some functions which cannot be used by Simulator are being hidden.

z� IV Sensor SimulationWith no sensor connected, it is possible to check the actual operation result based on the image history and the program saved in the batch backup file (*.iva). It is also possible to adjust the tool settings by changing the tool thresholds during simulation.

z� Confirming the image historyThe images in the image history saved as the batch backup file (*.iva) can be confirmed.

Simulator

7

Simulator


Basic Operation of Simulator

Basic Operation of Simulator

Operation flow of the Simulator

Saving the batch backup file (*.iva)Save the settings and the sensor image history from the operating sensor.

“Saving the batch backup file” (Page 7-3)

IV Sensor SimulationCheck the operation status based on the images of the image history.

“IV Sensor Simulation” (Page 7-14)

Exiting the SimulatorSave the batch backup file (*.iva).

“Exiting the Simulator” (Page 7-5)

Transferring to the sensorTransfer the batch backup file (*.iva) to the sensor.

“Transferring to the sensor” (Page 7-5)

Sensor Setup SimulationCheck/Change the settings.

“Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation)” (Page 7-8)

Starting the SimulatorOpen the batch backup file (*.iva) and start the Simulator.

“Starting the Simulator” (Page 7-4)

Saving the batch backup file

1 If you wish to perform the “IV Sensor Simulation”, save the sensor’s internal image history into the memory of the sensor.


2 Save the batch backup file (*.iva) to be read to the Simulator from the sensor. The saved settings are used for the Sensor Setup Simulation. For use of the “IV Sensor Simulation”, also save the image history.

“Backing up in a batch” (Page 6-21)

The batch backup file (*.iva) can be saved by using the monitor (IV-M30). For details, refer to the “IV Series User’s Manual (Monitor)”.

7

Simulator


Simulator

Starting the Simulator



2 Click the [Open file] button.

y If the [Language] is clicked, the Select language screen opens. Select the arbitrary language so that the language to be displayed can be switched. yThe Simulator can be opened by double-clicking an IVA file.

The [Open] screen opens.


Files with the formats other than iva format cannot be used.

The main screen for the Simulator opens.

Simulator screen and operation flowThis section explains the screen to be displayed in the Simulator and the operation flow.For details of what can be set on each screen and its operations, see to the applicable references.

Main screen of the Simulator(Page 7-6)

Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation)Check/Edit the program settings. (Page 7-8)

IV Sensor SimulationPerform the “IV Sensor Simulation” based on the image history. (Page 7-14)

7

Simulator


Simulator

Exiting the Simulator

1 Return to the main screen for the Simulator.If the [Sensor Setup Simulation] or [IV Sensor Simulation] is activating, exit it.

2 Select [File] → [Terminate IV-Simulator] from the menu bar.When the program setting or image history has been changed, the confirmation dialog to save appears.

3 Click the [Yes] button.The Save As screen opens.



The change contents are saved in the batch backup file (*.iva) and the system returns to the Activation Menu screen.

y If you want to reduce the file size, delete the entire image history with the [Image Hist.] on the main screen of the Simulator or the [Delete] button of [IV Sensor Simulation] before saving the file. Only the settings are saved and the file size becomes small. yWhen saving with the Simulator, “Statistics/Histogram screen in operation” and “Save Statistics/Histogram Data in operation” are not be saved.

Transferring to the sensor

1 Transfer the saved batch backup file to the sensor.

“Transferring the backed up settings to the sensor” (Page 6-23)

You can also use Monitor (IV-30) to transfer the batch backup file (*.iva) to the sensor. For details, refer to the “IV Series User’s Manual (Monitor)”.

7

Simulator


Names and Functions of the Screen

Main screen of the Simulator(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

(8)

(9)

(11)

(14)

(15)

(16)

(17)

(10)

(12)(13)

(1) File nameDisplays the file name of the batch backup file (*.iva) being opened by the Simulator.

(2) [Save] buttonSaves the settings being set in the Simulator into the batch backup file (*.iva).

“Save” (Page 7-18)

(3) Program informationDisplays the program number (Page 6-11) and program name (Page 6-12).Programs can be switched from the pull-down menu.

(4) [Detail] buttonDisplays the Program Details screen.

“Displaying the Program Details screen” (Page 6-11)

(5) [Image Hist.] buttonDisplays the sensor’s internal image history saved in the batch backup file (*.iva) being opened.


(6) [I/O Settings] buttonDisplays the I/O Settings screen.

“I/O Settings” (Page 7-21)

(7) [Advanced] buttonDisplays the Advanced Sensor Settings screen.

“Advanced Sensor Settings” (Page 7-21)

(8) Menu bar “Operating from the menu bar” (Page 7-18)

(9) Status barDisplays the image type (Master) and trigger type.

(10) Image tool barDisplays the tools for operating the image being displayed in the Simulator.


(11) Tool windowDisplays the selected tool region with an orange frame. You can also switch the selected tool by clicking the designated region.


(12) Search RegionIf the search region of the selected tool is being set to Partial, the search region will be displayed with a light blue frame.

(13) Brightness correction regionWhen the brightness correction is being set, the brightness correction region will be displayed with a blue frame.


7

Simulator



(14) Sensor InformationDisplays the Model and Device Name (Page 6-31) for the sensor.

(15) [Sensor Setup Simulation] buttonDisplays the Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation) screen.

“Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation)” (Page 7-8)

(16) [IV Sensor Simulation] buttonDisplays the IV Sensor Simulation screen.

“IV Sensor Simulation” (Page 7-14)

(17) Master image displayDisplays the master image registered to the currently selected program.

7

Simulator


Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation)

Settings Navigator screen and operation flowThis section explains each setting screen to be displayed in the Settings Navigator and the operation flow.For details of the contents which can set on each setting screen and its operations, refer to the applicable references.

Master Registration “2. Master Registration” (Page 7-10)

Image Optimization “1. Image Optimization” (Page 7-9)

Tool Settings “3. Tool Settings” (Page 7-12)

Output Assignment “4. Output Assignment” (Page 7-13)

A

A

A

A


7

Simulator



1. Image OptimizationConfirm the Image Optimization for taking an image of a target.

In the Settings Navigator of the Simulator, the settings of the Image Optimization can only be confirmed. Image Optimization cannot be changed.

Main screen for the Image OptimizationExplains the main screen for the Image Optimization.

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(6) (7)



(3) Image display screenOnly displays a message. The image will not be displayed.

(4) Settings buttonDisplays the settings which can be confirmed in the Image Optimization.

“Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8) “Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11) “Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13) “Extended Functions for the Image Optimization” (Page 4-16)

(5) Setting confirmation screenDisplays the settings of the item selected by the settings button in the tab format.

(6) [Next to STEP2] buttonProceeds to "2. Master Registration".

“2. Master Registration” (Page 7-10)

(7) [Exit Setup] buttonFinishes the Settings Navigator.


7

Simulator



2. Master RegistrationRegister a master image to be a reference for judgment. Also, set the Brightness Correction.

In the Settings Navigator of the Simulator, the following images can be registered as master image. y Images of the image history saved in the currently opened batch backup file (*.iva) yMaster image or images of the image history saved in a batch backup file (*.iva) other than the one currently opened y Image capture file (*.ivp)

Main screen for the Master RegistrationThis section explains the main screen for the Master Registration.

(3)

(1)

(2)

(4)

(5)

(8)(7) (9)

(6)




yMaster .............. Displays the master image.

(4) Image tool barDisplays the tools for operating the master image.


(5) Image by the sensorDisplays the master image.

(6) Edit settings screenDisplays the settings for the Master Registration in the tab format.

“Master registration from the image history in the sensor” (Page 7-11)

“Master registration using the file saved in the PC” (Page 7-11)

“Extended Functions for the Master Registration” (Page 4-25)

(7) [Back] buttonReturns to the settings screen for the Image Optimization.

“1. Image Optimization” (Page 7-9)(8) [Next to STEP3] button

Proceeds to “3. Tool settings”. “3. Tool Settings” (Page 7-12)



7

Simulator



Registering the master image

z�Master registration from the image history in the sensorRegister the image of the image history saved in the batch backup file (*.iva) as a master image.

To perform a master image registration from the image history in sensor, the image to be registered as a master image in the image history must be saved in advance.


For details of procedures, refer to “Master registration from the image history in the sensor” (Page 4-22).

z�Master registration using the file saved in the PCSelect the batch backup file (*.iva) or image capture file (*.ivp) stored in the PC, and register as a master image.

ySave the image to be registered as a master image into any PC in advance. yThe files which can be registered as a master image are batch backup files (*.iva) and the image capture files (*.ivp).

“Folder composition and file naming rules” (Page 6-25) yRegister images taken with a sensor with the same installation conditions and the same image-related settings (exposure conditions etc.). Otherwise correct judgment may not be possible.

For details of procedures, refer to “Master registration using the file saved in the PC” (Page 4-23).

7

Simulator



3. Tool SettingsTools for judgment of the quality of the target can be added, edited, copied, and deleted. For details, refer to “3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)” (Page 4-28).

In the Settings Navigator for the Simulator, following buttons will not be displayed. y [Live Adjustment] button for adjustment of the threshold of each tool y [to Live Image] button for color extraction (Color Area tool) and for brightness extraction (Area tool)

Main screen for the Tool settingsThis section explains the main screen for the Tool settings.

(3)

(1)

(2)

(4)

(5)

(9)(8) (10)

(6)

(7)





(4) Image tool barDisplays the tools for operating the master image.


(5) Master imageDisplays a master image and a tool window. If a search region is set, the tool window which indicates the search region (light blue) will be displayed.By clicking the tool window, the selected tool can be switched.

(6) Tool settings buttonAdds, edits, copies, and deletes the tool.

“Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a tool” (Page 4-31)

(7) Tool listDisplays a list of tools set in the program and a threshold of each tool.

(8) [Back] buttonThe system returns to the Master Registration screen.

“2. Master Registration” (Page 7-10)

(9) [Next to STEP4] buttonProceeds to output assignment.

“4. Output Assignment” (Page 7-13)



7

Simulator



4. Output AssignmentSet the output items to be assigned to the output line (OUT1 to OUT4).

“Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor” (Page 2-8) “Chapter 8 Controlling with Input/Output Line” (Page 8-1)

Main screen for the Output AssignmentThis section explains the main screen for the Output Assignment.

(3)

(1)

(2)

(4)

(5)

(9)(8)

(7)

(6)







(5) Master imageDisplays the master image.

(6) Tool settings button y [Output Assignment] tabAssigns the output item to each output line.

“Setting the Output Assignment” (Page 4-61) y [Extended Functions] tabSets the total status conditions and logics.

“Setting the Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-63) “Setting Logics” (Page 4-64)

(7) [Valid]/[Invalid] setting for the trigger error outputSelects whether to enable/disable the output when the trigger error occurred.

“Error Messages” (Page A-19)

(8) [Back] buttonReturns to the Tool settings screen.

“3. Tool Settings” (Page 7-12)

(9) [Complete] buttonFinishes the Settings Navigator.


7

Simulator


IV Sensor Simulation

Main screen of the IV Sensor Simulation

For Outline/Position Adjustment tool(1) (2) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

(11)(10)

(9)

(3)

(13)

(20)

(14)(15)(16)(17)

(18)

(12)

(19)

(1) [Batch retest] buttonPerforms batch operation simulation for all images.

(2) [Reset] buttonResets the result of batch operation simulation for every image. The status result will be [--].

(3) Operating button for operation simulation y (Reproduction)

... Start operation simulation one by one in order from the selected history image. The reproduction speed (Fast/Normal/Slow) can be selected by clicking the [▼] button.

y (Stop).......... Stop the operation simulation being reproduced.

y (Back) ......... Shift the history image selection one position to the left.

y (Next) .......... Shift the history image selection one position to the right.

y (Repeat) ..... When this button is ON ( ), the operation simulation is repeated from the first history image after the operation simulation for the last history image ends. Repeat can be switched ON/OFF during reproduction.

y (Go to the next OK Image)

... Transition to the next OK image after the selected history image.

y (Go to the next NG Image)

... Transition to the next NG image after the selected history image.

When (Go to the next OK Image) / (Go to the next NG Image) is executed after the settings for a threshold etc. have been changed, the judgment result may be changed depending on the simulation result.

(4) [Add Image] buttonAdd an image to be used for the operation simulation from a batch backup file (*.iva) or an image capture file (*.ivp).


7

Simulator



(5) [Delete] buttonDeletes the selected image.The type of the image to be deleted can be selected by clicking the [▼] button.

yDelete All ............ Deletes all images. yDelete OK only ... Deletes all of OK images. yDelete NG only ... Deletes all of NG images. yDelete all images on the left from the one selected

... Deletes all images on the left from the one selected.

yDelete all images on the right from the one selected

... Deletes all images on the right from the one selected.

When an image has been deleted from the menu displayed by clicking the [▼] button, the [Undo Delete] button becomes disabled. The deletion of the image cannot be undone.

(6) [Undo Delete] buttonRestores an image which have been deleted by clicking the [Delete] button. You can undo back up to 20 images.

(7) Number of OKs/NGsDisplays the number of images for which the judgment result from the operation simulation is OK or NG.

(8) Image numberDisplay the image No. of the history images read into the Simulator as “(Currently selected image No.)/(Total number of images)”.

(9) Thumbnail image (image history)The image becoming the target of theoperation simulation. Displays the number of triggers, the status result of the operation simulation, and the thumbnail image.

y For details of number of triggers, refer to “Displaying the statistical information” (Page 5-10). yUnnecessary images can be deleted ((5) [Delete] button) and necessary images can be added from a different file ((4) [Add Image] button). yThe display order can be changed by drag and drop of the selected image. The [Undo Delete] button becomes disabled when the display order has been changed. y In the initial status, the newest image is at the left edge. The history becomes older from the left to the right.

(10) Image being selected (Orange frame)Indicates the image being selected.IV Sensor Simulation is performed automatically for the selected image and the judgment result is displayed.

(11) Status resultDisplays the judgment result for IV Sensor Simulation for the selected thumbnail image.

(12) Magnified display screenMagnifies the selected thumbnail image.


(13) Status gaugeDisplays the tools set in the program. Tool name, threshold, matching rate for each tool and status result are displayed.Status result OK is displayed in green and NG is displayed in red.

y Judge is OK

y Judge is NGMatching rate and

status result

ThresholdTool Name

For details of status results, refer to “Displaying and outputting the status result” (Page A-4).

7

Simulator



(14) Tool NameDisplays the tool name of the selected tool.

(15) Judgment recordDisplays the number of images for OK or NG.

yOK .... Displays the number of images for “OK”. yNG .... Displays the number of images for “NG”.

(16) Matching rate information yMAX ..... Displays the maximum value of the

matching rate. yMIN ...... Displays the minimum value of the

matching rate. yAVE ...... Displays the average value of the

matching rate.

(17) HistogramDisplays the result of the operation simulation for the selected tool as a histogram (frequency distribution).With the threshold being a border, the range for OK is displayed in green and for NG is displayed in red.

yAbscissa axis ... Displays the distribution range of the matching rate. The display range is fixed. It cannot be specified arbitrary.

yVertical axis ...... This will be adjusted automatically according to the maximum value of the frequency. It cannot be specified arbitrary.

(18) Matching rate of the latest judgment processDisplays the matching rate of the latest judgment process.The status result changes according to the setting of the threshold value.

(19) ThresholdDisplays the threshold of the selected tool. The threshold value can be changed by dragging the slider.

(20) [Complete] buttonThe system returns to the main screen for the Simulator.

For Color Area/Area tool During operation simulation for the Color Area/Area tool, [Color Extraction (Color Area tool)], [Brightness Extraction (Area tool)], and [Upper Limit] are displayed in addition to the functions displayed on the main screen of the Outline tool/Position Adjustment tool.

(1) (2)

*The screen for the Color Area tool

(1) Color Extraction (Color Area tool)/ Brightness Extraction (Area tool)The screen for setting the Color Area/Area extraction range appears when the [Setup] button is clicked.For details of setting procedures, refer to “Setting the Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-44).

(2) Upper LimitWhen the checkbox for the upper limit threshold is checked , the slider for setting the upper and the lower limit of the threshold appears.For details of setting procedures, refer to “Setting the upper limit” (Page 4-48).

Other than the above, the main screen of “IV Sensor Simulation” for the Color Area / Area tool is the same as the main screen of “IV Sensor Simulation” for the Outline tool/Position Adjustment tool.

“For Outline/Position Adjustment tool” (Page 7-14)

7

Simulator



Starting the IV Sensor Simulation

1 Displays the main screen for the Simulator.

“Starting the Simulator” (Page 7-4)

2 Click the [IV Sensor Simulation] button.

The message dialog appears.

3 Click the [OK] button.The IV Sensor Simulation screen opens.

4 Perform the IV Sensor Simulation by clicking the [Batch retest] button.

For operations of IV Sensor Simulation, refer to “Main screen of the IV Sensor Simulation”

(Page 7-14).

Please perform “Batch retest” when the setting for “Color Extraction”/”Brightness Extraction” or the setting of the threshold has been changed. If this is not done, pay attention to the following items.

yThe frequency distribution of the histogram is not displayed correctly (when the setting has been changed, the matching rate may change after retesting). y The “Number of OKs/NGs” and the “Judgment record” are not updated.

5 After the IV Sensor Simulation is completed, click the [Complete] button at the lower right on the screen.The system returns to the main screen for the Simulator.

The test results will not be saved. If you want to check the test results again, perform IV Sensor Simulation (Batch retest) with the same settings and the same image history.

7

Simulator



[File] menu

Open fileOpens the batch backup file (*.iva) saved in the PC.

1 Select [File] → [Open file] from the menu bar.The [Open] screen opens.


Files with the formats other than iva format cannot be used.

The main screen for the Simulator opens.

SaveSave the contents set with the Simulator as a batch backup file (*.iva) to the PC.

1 Select [File] → [Save] from the menu bar.The save as screen opens.




3 Click the [OK] button.The system returns to the main screen for the Simulator.

Export

z� Save Program Settings ListOutputs the sensor information held in the IV-Simulator as the tab-delimited text.For details, refer to “Program Settings List” (Page 6-45).

z� Save Statistics/Histogram Data in operation

Outputs the same statistical information and histogram information as when operating with sensor as the tab-delimited text.The histogram data at the time of “IV Operation Simulation” is not output. For details, refer to “Statistics/Histogram Data” (Page 6-45).


7

Simulator



Check Statistics/Histogram in operationDisplays the statistical information and the histogram information at the time of operation with a sensor, saved in a batch backup file (*.iva).

If one of the following cases applies for the batch backup file (*.iva), display is not possible because the statistical information and the histogram information in operation has not been saved.

yWhen saving has been done in the sensor with the version of the sensor operation software which is less than R1.10 yWhen saving has been done without performing judgment processing even once after power ON or after program switching yWhen saving has been done with the SimulatorDisplay is not performed when saving has been done with the Simulator even when the settings or the image history have not been changed.

1 Select [File] → [Check Statistics/Histogram in operation] from the menu bar.The Statistics/Histogram screen in operation appears.

When multiple tools have been set, the statistical information and histogram information at display can be switched by selecting the tool from the pull-down menu.

Terminate IV-SimulatorTerminates the Simulator and returns to the Activation Menu screen.Refer to “Exiting the Simulator” (Page 7-5).

ExitExit the IV-Navigator.

1 Select [File] → [Exit] from the menu bar.When the program setting or image history has been changed, the confirmation dialog to save appears.

2 Click the [Yes] button.The change contents are saved in a batch backup file (*.iva) and the IV-Navigator terminates.

[View] menu

Message when activating IV Sensor Simulator

Switch is made between message display and no message display when the [IV Sensor Simulation] button is clicked. Select [View] → [Message when activating IV Sensor Simulator] from the menu bar, and then select [Show]/[Hide].

7

Simulator



[Image] menu

Zoom

z� ReduceReduces the image displayed on the Simulator.For details, refer to “Zoom Out” (Page 6-47).

z� EnlargeEnlarges the image displayed on the Simulator.For details, refer to “Zoom In” (Page 6-47).

z� Fit to WindowDisplays the image displayed on the Simulator by fitting it to the screen size.For details, refer to “Fit to Window” (Page 6-47).

Tool Display OptionsSwitches the display method of the tool.For details, refer to “Tool Display Options” (Page 6-47).

Capture

z� Save ImageSaves the bmp format file of the image displayed in the Simulator and the ivp format file which can be used for a master image registration or Tool Auto Tuning at the same time.The IV-Navigator’s screen will also be saved atthe same time (screenshot).Select [Image] → [Capture] → [Save Image] from the menu bar.

z� Show saved image file locationOpens the saving destination folder of the captured image.Select [Image] → [Capture] → [Show saved image file location] from the menu bar.

z� Change saved image file locationOpens the reference screen of a folder and changes a saving destination of the captured image.For details, refer to “Change saved image file location” (Page 6-48).

[Setting] menu

LanguageSwitches the display language of the IV-Navigator.For details, refer to “Language” (Page 6-49).

The displayed language can be switched on the Activation Menu screen of the IV-Navigator (Page 3-2).

7

Simulator



[Window] menu

Program DetailsDisplays the Program Details screen.Select [Window] → [Program Details] from the menu bar.For details on the Program Details screen, refer to

“Displaying the Program Details screen” (Page 6-11).

Sensor’s Internal Image HistoryDisplays the Sensor’s internal Image history screen.Select [Window] → [Sensor’s Internal Image History] from the menu bar.For details on the Sensor’s internal image history screen, refer to “Sensor’s Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 6-15).

Following buttons and menus will not be displayed in the Sensor’s internal image history screen of the Simulator.

y [Refresh] button y [Inspection Tool Auto Tuning] button y [Batch Backup (*.iva)] menu

I/O SettingsDisplays the I/O Settings screen.Select [Window] → [I/O Settings] from the menu bar.For details on the I/O Settings screen, refer to “Setting the Input and Output Information of the Sensor” (Page 6-26).

The [I/O Monitor] tab is not displayed on the I/O Settings screen with Simulator. Only confirmation is possible for [Polarity].

Advanced Sensor SettingsDisplays the Advanced Sensor Settings screen.Select [Window] → [Advanced Sensor Settings] from the menu bar.For details on the Advanced Sensor Settings screen, refer to “Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor” (Page 6-30).

The following limitations apply for the Advanced Sensor Settings screen with Simulator.

yThe [Backup] tab and the [Initialize/Update] tab are not displayed. yThe sensor setting contents saved in the batch backup file (*.iva) can be confirmed. ySetting change is possible for [Security] and [Device Name].

[Help] menu

User's ManualOpens the User's Manual (PDF format) of the selected language.For details, refer to “User’s Manual” (Page 6-50).

Version informationDisplays the version information of the IV-Navigator.For details, refer to “Version information” (Page 6-50).

7

Simulator



MEMO

7

Simulator


This chapter explains how the input/output terminal controls each operation.

Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers ....................................8-2Importing the Status Output .............................8-4Changing Over ...................................................8-7Registering the Master Image ..........................8-8Clearing Errors ................................................8-10Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on .........................................................8-11Input Response Time ......................................8-12

8

Controlling with Input/Output Line

8

Controlling w

ith the Input/Output Line


Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers

For details of the trigger, refer to “Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8).“Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8)..

External triggerWhen the [Trigger Options] is set to [External Trigger], imaging and judgment are performed at the timing of inputting the external trigger input.

(1)

(2)

(3)

Min 1.2 msMin 100 μs

Processing time

Trigger delayMin 0.2 ms

External trigger input

BUSY output

Judgment process (internal)

Trigger error output

Total status outputStatus output of each tool

Position adjustment outputEach logic output

Trigger 1

Max 2 ms

Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2 Result from Trigger 4

Max 2 ms

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

(4)

(5)

Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Trigger 4

(1) Positions the target and inputs external trigger. The shortest input time is 100 μs for ON, and 1.2 ms for OFF.

(2) BUSY output function turns ON. Processing time differs depending on the settings.

(3) After the trigger delay time (Page 4-8) elapses, the target is imaged and the judgment process is performed.

(4) After the judgment process is completed, it updates status output and the BUSY output function is turned OFF. Confirms that the BUSY output is turned OFF, then imports the status output.

(5) If the external trigger is input while the BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [Valid].

yThe ON status of each output is as follows.When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF. yThe ON status of each input indicates 0 V line is shorted when the Polarity (Page 6-25) is NPN, and indicates that voltage is applied within the 0 V line when the Polarity is PNP. yThe edge trigger for activating timing or in deactivating timing can be set for the external trigger input.

“Input Settings” (Page 6-26) yThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared, when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen. yWhen the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to “Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 8-6).


8

Controlling w




Internal triggerWhen the [Trigger Options] is set to [Internal Trigger], imaging and judgment are performed at the timing of set trigger interval.

Processing time

Trigger interval Trigger interval Trigger interval Trigger interval

Min 0.2 ms

Internal trigger

(1)

(2)

(3)Judgment process (internal)

BUSY output




Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2 Result from Trigger 4

(5)

(4)

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Trigger 4 Trigger 5

(1) Inputs internal trigger in the trigger interval being set.

(2) BUSY output function turns ON at the timing that internal trigger occurred. Processing time differs depending on the settings.

(3) The target is imaged and judged. No trigger delay settings.

(4) After the judgment process is completed, it updates status output and the BUSY output function is turned OFF. Confirms that the BUSY output is turned OFF, then imports the status output.

(5) If the internal trigger is input while the BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [Valid].

yThe ON status of each output is as follows.When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF. yThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared, when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen. yWhen the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to “Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 8-6).

Set the trigger interval longer than the processing time. If the trigger interval is shorter than the processing time, the internal trigger will be input during the processing time, so the trigger error will occur.

Operating in the shortest cycleTo input the internal trigger in the shortest cycle and perform the judgment process, set the trigger input to 1 ms. Also, set the trigger error in the output assignment of Settings Navigator (Page 4-60) to [Off] and ignore the trigger error.

8

Controlling w



Importing the Status Output

Imports the status output assigned to output line of power I/O cable. For details on assigning to output line, refer to “4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60).“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)..

Importing the total status / total status NG outputOverall status results of multiple detection tools and position adjustments for the examined target can be checked.

Black line: OUT 1Assign the total status/ total status NG output

White line: OUT 2Assign the BUSY output

External trigger/Internal trigger

Total status result of Trigger 1Previous total status result

Processing time

Min 0.2 ms

ONOFF

ONOFF

Trigger 1

yThe operation example when the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to “Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 8-6). yWhen the total status result was OK, the total status output turns ON. When the total status result was NG, the total status output turns OFF.

The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. y [All Tools OK]When all of the status results of the detection tools and the adjustment result of the position adjustment result were OK, the total status result is OK. y [Any Tool OK]When any of the status results of the detection tools except that of the position adjustment was OK, the total status result is OK. y [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]When the logical operation result of the set detection tools was OK, the total status result is OK.

yThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF when the program number is switched or external master image is registered. yThe ON status of each output is as follows.When Output Settings (Page 6-24) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.When Output Settings (Page 6-24) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.


8

Controlling w




Importing the individual status output of each detection tool / logicThe individual status result of the detection tool and position adjustment for the examined target can be checked.

Orange line: OUT 4Assign "Logic 1"

Gray line: OUT 3Assign "Tool 2"

White line: OUT 2Assign "Tool 1"

Black line: OUT 1Assign the BUSY output

Trigger input

Previous result Status result of Tool 1

Previous result Status result of Tool 2

Previous result Status result of Logic 1

Processing time

Min 0.2 ms

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

Trigger 1

yThe operation example when the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to “Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 8-6). yThis is an example when the status results of Tool 1, Tool 2, and Logic 1 are to be checked individually. yThe status output turns ON when the status result of each tool / logic was OK. Turns OFF when the result was NG or --. yThe ON status of each output is as follows.When Output Settings (Page 6-24) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.When Output Settings (Page 6-24) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF. yThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF when the program number is switched or external master image is registered.

8

Controlling w




Changing the timing of the status outputThe timing of status output can be selected from the [Latching] which links to judgment and [One-Shot] which outputs for a certain time. For details on settings, refer to “Output Settings” (Page 6-27).“Output Settings” (Page 6-27)..

BUSY output

Status output(Latching output)

Status output(One-Shot output) Status result of Trigger 1 Status result of Trigger 2

Previous status result Status result of Trigger 1 Status result of Trigger 2

Delay time Delay timeOne-Shot ON Time One-Shot ON Time


Min 0.2 ms

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

Trigger 1 Trigger 2

y In case of [Latching], updates the output by linking with judgment. y In case of [One-Shot], outputs in a set amount of time after the set delay time is passed. yWhen the program number is switched or the external master image is registered, the status output turns OFF before each process is completed.

Cancelling One-Shot outputTo use the One-Shot output function, the following condition needs to be met.

Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > One-Shot ON Time

If the above is not met, the following One-Shot output that occurs during the One-Shot outputting is cancelled and is not output.

Trigger input interval

One-Shot ON TimeJudgment process

Internal process of Trigger 2

Internal process of Trigger 1

BUSY output

Status result of Trigger 1

Status result of Trigger 1 (internal)

Status result of Trigger 2 (internal)

One-Shot ON Time

Delay time

Delay time

Delay time One-Shot ON Time

(1)

(2)

(3)


ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

Trigger 1 Trigger 2

(1) This is an example of what happens when the trigger input interval is shorter than the One-Shot ON Time.

(2) To perform the One-Shot output and output the status result of Trigger 1, the previous One-Shot output is completed, so that outputting can be performed normally.

(3) To perform One-Shot output and output the status result of Trigger 2, the One-Shot output of Trigger 1 is output. Therefore, the output status of Trigger 2 will be cancelled and it will not be output.

y If the BUSY time is not constant, meet the following condition to use it. The system might be affected by a fluctuating BUSY time.

BUSY time + Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > BUSY time + One-Shot ON Time

8

Controlling w



Changing Over

Program functions can easily change over by reading out the judgment condition previously saved with the input line. For details of program functions, refer to “Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)” (Page 6-6)..

Program number



BUSY output

Program bit0 to bit4Input


Min 0 ms

PROG00

PROG00

PROG02PROG01

Previous result Result from Trigger 1

PROG01 PROG02

Switching time (T1) Switching time

Min 10 ms

T2

(1) (5)

(2)

(3)

(4)


ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3

(1) Keeps the Program bit0 to bit4 input by switching to the state of the program number to be switched. Minimum input time is 10 ms.

“When switching the program by the external input” (Page 6-10)“When switching the program by the external input” (Page 6-10)

(2) The BUSY output turns ON while switching the programs. Switching time differs depending on the settings.

(3) The output status (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the switching program is completed.

(4) If the program number is switched during the judgment process by the trigger input, the system cancels the judgment process (result of Trigger 2 is not output). The switching process is delayed by the canceling process. Delay is time differs depending on the settings.

(5) If the trigger occurs while switching the programs (during the BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a trigger error occurs. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under the Settings Navigator to [Valid]. In the case of a manual trigger, the trigger is processed after the switching program is completed.

yFor details on T1 and T2, refer to “Input Response Time” (Page 8-12). yUse this function during operation. Programs cannot be switched with the external input during setup. yThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared, when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen. y If the switched program is set to [Internal Trigger], the first timing for inputting the trigger after switching the program fluctuates. A delay of one trigger interval may occur. yDo not use with the external master registration input at the same time. The sequence for switching programs and external master registration process will vary. yThe response of an image displayed on the IV-Navigator might be delayed until after switching programs (BUSY output OFF).

Changing Over

8

Controlling w



Registering the Master Image

The external master registration function can register the master image with using the input line. For details on master image registration, refer to “2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20)..

Judgment process (internal)

BUSY output

External master registration input



Master image (internal)

Error output


Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2

Previous master image

In case of failure

Image of Trigger 1

Image of Trigger 1

Master image registration time (T3)

(Min 2 ms)Min 2 ms

T4

(7)

(2)

(1)

(3)

(6)

(5)

(4)

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

Trigger 1 Trigger 2

(1) Takes an image to be registered as a master image by the external trigger or internal trigger.

(2) If the BUSY output turns OFF, the external master registration input will be input. Minimum ON/OFF input time is 2 ms.

(3) The BUSY output turns ON and the master registration starts. The master registration time differs depends on the settings.

(4) The status output (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the master image registration is completed.

(5) The image imaged in Trigger 1 will be registered as a master image.

(6) If the external image registration is failed, the error output turns ON. Check that the external master image registration is succeeded with the error output. In case of failure, the image will not be updated from the previous master image. The error output turns OFF when the external master image registration is succeeded or by the clear error input.

(7) After the master image registration is completed, the judgment process is performed with the new master image. Trigger 2 judges the target with using an image of Trigger 1 as a master image.


8

Controlling w




yFor details of T3 and T4, refer to “Input Response Time” (Page 8-12). yUse this function during operation. The external master image registration cannot be performed during setup. y If the trigger occurs while registering the master image (during BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a trigger error occurs. The trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the program is switched, or when the error is cleared. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [Valid]. y If the external master registration input is input during the imaging process (BUSY) by the trigger, the system cancels the judgment process (taken image will not be registered). After the process is canceled, the image taken before cancellation is registered as a master image. The master image registration process is delayed by the cancelling process. Delaying time differs depending on the settings. yDo not change over the programs at the same time as external master registration input is being performed. The sequence of the external master registration and switching programs process will vary.

y If the external master image registration is to be performed frequently, set [Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save?] of the input option to [No] to protect the nonvolatile memory of the internal sensor. For details of settings, refer to “Input Settings” (Page 6-26).“Input Settings” (Page 6-26)..

ROM writing settings

Master image is registered externally when power is turned OFF

Number of times that external master image

registration can perform (duration)

YesThe master image is not deleted.The image can be used as a master image after starting up the device next time.

100,000 times

NoThe master image is deleted.External master image registration needs to be performed after starting up the device.

No limit

y If the setting for writing to ROM is set to [No], the image is written to ROM when the system is in the settings mode. The master image is not deleted once the system is in the settings mode before the power is turned OFF. y If the setting is set to [Yes], do not turn OFF the power during the master registration time (T3). Otherwise, all or part of the setting data may be lost.

8

Controlling w



Clearing Errors

If an error targeted for clearing is occurred, outputting an error can be turned OFF by the clear error input.

Error output

Clear Error input

Min 2 ms(Min 2 ms)

T5

(1)

(2)

ONOFF

ONOFF

Error occurred

(1) If an error occurred, the error output turns ON.Error types which can be output are as follows.

ySystem error yStartup memory readout error yExternal master registration error yTrigger error

To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [Valid].

yFTP errorTo output the FTP error, set the FTP error within the FTP settings (Page 6-36) to [Enable].

(2) The error output can be turned OFF by the clear error input. Minimum ON/OFF input time is 2 ms. Errors which can be cleared are as follows.

yExternal master registration error yTrigger error yFTP error

The system error/startup memory readout error cannot be cleared.

yFor details on T5, refer to “Input Response Time” (Page 8-12).

Clearing Errors

8

Controlling w



Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on

Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on

Operations when the power is turned ON are as follows. Check activation of the BUSY output when starting operation.

Program number

Power (DC24V)ON

OFF

BUSY outputON

OFF

Error outputON

OFF

RUN outputON

OFF



ON

OFF

Initializing2 seconds or longer

BUSY20 ms or longer RUN RUN System errorSetting

Determine the I/O settings

(1)

(2)

(3) (4)

(5)

(6)

Trigger Trigger

Min 0.2 ms

Min 0.2 msMin 0 ms

(1) After the power turned ON, the I/O settings (NPN or PNP and N.O. or N.C.) will be determined. “Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page 3-9)“Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page 3-9) “I/O Polarity” (Page 6-28)“I/O Polarity” (Page 6-28) “Output Settings” (Page 6-27)“Output Settings” (Page 6-27)

(2) The program number will be determined. When the "Enable program switching through external input" (Page 6-26) check box is set to ON , the program number is determined according to the inputting condition of the input line.

(3) BUSY output function turns ON. y In case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON. y In case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to OFF, so no changes occur.

(4) The BUSY output turns OFF and the system starts to operate. y In case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from ON to OFF. y In case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON.

By checking the activation of the BUSY output, operation in N.O./N.C. can be checked.

(5) If the startup error is occurred, the error output turns ON during the BUSY status.(6) The RUN output turns ON when the sensor is running with no system error occurring.

yThe ON status of each output is as follows.When the Output Settings (Page 6-27) is [N.O.] : The status when the NPN or PNP open collector is ON.When the Output Settings (Page 6-27) is [N.C.] : The status when the NPN or PNP open collector is OFF. yThe RUN output, BUSY output and error output will be output from the output line assigned in output assignment for program numbers (Page 4-60) determined after the power is turned ON. If the outputs are not being assigned, it will not be output.

8

Controlling w



Input Response Time

The following response times are the typical examples (typ.). The response time differs greatly depending on the settings or the image processing condition. Control by confirming the BUSY output for securing from the affect of different response times.

Response time for the switch program inputT1 (Switch program time) = A + B + C + E + 50 [ms] (typ.)T2 = 10 [ms] (typ.)

Response time for the external master registration inputT3 (Master registration time) = A + B + D + E + 50 [ms] (typ.)T4 = 5 [ms] (typ.)

Response time for the error clear inputT5 = 5 [ms] (typ.)

Description for symbols

Symbols Description Time

A Judgment process cancelling time *

400 (800) [ms] (typ.)Added when it is input during the judgment process.

B Tool registration time *

Total of the "Registration time x Number of set tools" for following each toolPosition adjustment : 100 (500) [ms] (typ.)Outline : 100 (500) [ms] (typ.)Color area : 100 [ms] (typ.)Area : 100 [ms] (typ.)

C Auto focus position adjustment time

860 [ms] (typ.)Added only when auto focus-type sensor is used and the [Auto Focus Adjustment Position] (Page 6-35) is set to [Individual].

D Nonvolatile memory saving time

3500 [ms] (typ.)Added only when the [Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save] (Page 6-26) is set to [Yes].

E Trigger delay timeTrigger delay setting time (0 to 1000) [ms]Added only when the [External Trigger] (Page 4-10) is selected for trigger type.

* These are the times in case the version of the sensor operation software is R1.10 or later. The times for the version R1.00 are those inside ().

Input Response Time

8

Controlling w



9

Specifications

This chapter explains the specifications and dimensions of the sensor and software.

Specifications ....................................................9-2Dimensions ........................................................9-5

9

Specifications


9

Specifications

Specifications

Sensor

Model IV-500C IV-500CA IV-500M IV-500MA IV-150M IV-150MA IV-2000M IV-2000MA

Installed distanceStandard range Short range Long range50 to 500mm 50 to 150mm 300 to 2000mm

View

Installed distance 50 mm :25 (H) x 18 (V) mm

toInstalled distance 500mm :

210 (H) x 157 (V) mm

Installed distance 50mm :

12 (H) x 9 (V) mmto


36 (H) x 27 (V) mm


45 (H) x 33 (V) mmto


300 (H) x 225 (V) mm

Image sensor 1/3 inchcolor CMOS

1/3 inchmonochrome CMOS

Pixel 752 (H) x 480 (V)Focus adjustment Manual Auto*1 Manual Auto*1 Manual Auto*1 Manual Auto*1

Exposure time 1/10 to 1/50,000 1/10 to 1/25,000 1/20 to 1/25,000 1/10 to 1/25,000

LightAmplifier type White LED Red LED Infrared LED

Lighting method Pulse lighting/DC lighting is switchable

ToolType Outline search, Color area*7, Area*8, Position adjustment

Number*2 Detection tools : 16 tools, Position adjustment tool : 1 toolSwitch settings

(programs) 32 programs

Image history*3

Numbers 100 images*4 300 images*5

Condition NG only/All is selectable

Analysis information *6

OFF/Statistics/Histograms is switchableStatistics : Processing time (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE), numbers of OKs,

numbers of NGs, trigger numbers, trigger errors, judge results list by tools

Histograms : Histogram, matching degree (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE), numbers of OKs, numbers of NGs

Other functionsHDR, High Gain, Color Filters*7, Digital Zoom*8, Brightness Correction, Tilt correction, White balance*7, Mask outline, Mask area, Test run, ToolAutoTune, Input monitor, Output test, Security settings, Simulator*9

Indicators PWR/ERR, OUT, TRIG, STATUS, LINK/ACT

Input

No-voltage input/voltage input is switchableFor no-voltage input : ON voltage 2V or lower, OFF current 0.1mA or lower,

ON current 2mA (short circuit)For voltage input : Maximum input rating 26.4V, ON voltage 15V or higher,

OFF current 0.2mA or lower, ON current 2mA (for 24V)Inputs 6 inputs (IN1 to IN6)

FunctionIN1 : External trigger, IN2 to IN6 : Enable by assigning the optional functionsAssignable functions : Program switching, Clear error, External master image registration

Specifications


9

Specifications

Specifications

Model IV-500C IV-500CA IV-500M IV-500MA IV-150M IV-150MA IV-2000M IV-2000MA

Output

Open collector output NPN/PNP is switchable, N.O./N.C. is switchableFor open collector NPN output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA,

remaining voltage 1.5V or lowerFor open collector PNP output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA,

remaining voltage 2V or lowerOutputs 4 outputs (OUT1 to OUT4)

Function

Enable by assigning the optional functionsAssignable functions : Total judge result, RUN, BUSY, Error, Position adjustment result,

Judge result of each tool, Logical operation result of each tool

Ethernet*10 Standard 100BASE-TX/10BASE-TConnector M12 4pin connector

Network function FTP client, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET

Rating

Power voltage DC 24V ± 10% (including ripple)

Consumption current 0.6A or less

Environmental resistance

Ambient temperature 0 to +50°C (No freezing)

Relative humidity 35 to 85%RH (No condensation)

Vibration 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y, and Z axesShock

resistance 500m/s2 6 different directions in 3 times

Enclosure rating*11 IP67

Material Main unit case : Aluminum die-casting, Packing : NBR, Front Cover : Acrylic, Mounting adapter : POM

Weight Approx. 270 g

*1 The focusing position can be automatically adjusted at the time of installation. Disabled during the operation. The focusing position can be registered by programs.

*2 Tools can be installed by programs.*3 Saves to the memory in the sensor. The images saved in the sensor can be backed up to the USB memory installed to the intelligent

monitor (IV-M30) or to the PC by the software for IV (IV-H1).*4 70 images when using the FTP client function*5 210 images when using the FTP client function*6 This can be displayed on the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or by the IV software (IV-H1).*7 Color type only.*8 Monochrome type only.*9 This function can be used with the software for IV (IV-H1).*10 This is for connection with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or the IV software (IV-H1).*11 Except when the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87436/OP-87437) is mounted.


9

Specifications

Specifications

IV Software

Model IV-H1

System requirements

Interface Equip the Ethernet (100BASE-TX) interface

OSWindows 7 Home Premium/Professional/Ultimate *1

Windows XP Professional/HomeEditionOne of the OS must be installed.

Languages Japanese / English / German / Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional) / Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean

Processor Windows 7: Needs to be compliant with system requirements for OS.Windows XP: Pentium III or better Clock speed 1 GHz or faster

Memory capacity Windows 7: Needs to be compliant with system requirements for OS.Windows XP: 512 MB or more (1GB or more is recommended)

Required capacity for installation 1 GB or more

Monitor Resolution 1024 × 768 pixel or higher, display color High Color (16bit) or higher

Operating conditions .NET Framework 2.0 SP 2 needs to be installed *2.

*1 Supported for 32bit and 64bit version.*2 If .NET Framework 2.0 SP2 is not being installed, this will be automatically installed at the time of IV-H1

installation.


9

Specifications

Dimensions

Sensor

y IV-500C y IV-500CA




Mounting adapter

(102)R50

R50

(108)

50

57.4

32.4

56

81.5

50

10.5

10.5

610.5

20.5

41

(Depth 6mm)3-M3

45.5 25

58

2052

0.4

WD referencesurface

(Depth 6mm)4-M4

Focusing position adjustment screw(MF type only)

1/4-20UNC(Depth 6mm)

Dimensions


9

Specifications

Dimensions

yWith dome attachmentInstalled distance : 0 to 50 mm from the front of the dome attachmentCompatible sensor : Standard range type/Short range type

62

34.6

φ134

Distance from WD reference surface

yWith polarizing filter attachment

φ56

5

32

Distance from WD reference surface

Optional parts for the sensor

Dome attachment

y IV-D10

φ134

90.4


9

Specifications

Dimensions

Polarizing filter attachment yOP-87436 yOP-87437

φ56

32

Front cover yOP-87461

φ50

27.1 0.4

Mounting adapter yOP-87460

φ6.8 Counterbore depth 3mm4-φ3.2

20

57

56

2517

4-M4(Depth 6mm)

1/4-20UNC(Depth 6mm)

Power I/O cable yOP-87440 (2m)

yOP-87441 (5m)

yOP-87442 (10m)

1000050002000

φ6.7

45

φ15

120 5150 5

180 5


9

Specifications

Dimensions

Bracket yOP-87685

48.4

0.4 112.5

50

(99) 58

41

31.6

99

19.6

93

56

82.5

Communication cables

Ethernet cable yOP-87454 (2m)

yOP-87455 (5m)

yOP-87456 (10m)

20005000

1000044.7 44.1

φ6.2

φ14

16.8

NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable yOP-87457 (2m)

yOP-87458 (5m)

yOP-87459 (10m)

20005000

1000051.3 47

φ6.5

φ15

14.7

A-1- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

A

Status Table ......................................................A-2Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool ................................A-5Settings List ......................................................A-6Troubleshooting .............................................A-16Error Messages...............................................A-19Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor ............................A-25Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch) ............................................A-35Maintenance ....................................................A-36Index ................................................................A-38

Appendices

A-2 - IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

A

Status Table

Status Table

¡/Í indicates enable/disable of the input.ON/OFF indicates the following status. The operation differs according to the output setting (N.O./N.C).

yFor N.O. ON : Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output. OFF : Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output.

yFor N.C. ON : Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output. OFF : Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output.

*1 Turns ON if the judgment is OK. Turns OFF if it is NG. When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON. When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON. The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. “Setting the Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-63)“Setting the Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-63) When the position adjustment is NG, the status of each tool becomes NG.*2 The sensor continues running even during the operation of [Sensor’s internal image history] screen in

the main screen of [Run].*3 Indicates the overall status result of the previous judgment process.

OK: Lighting (green), NG: Lighting (red)*4 Outputs the status result of the previous judgment process.*5 Lights (one-shot) by linking to the trigger issuance (external/internal). When a trigger delay has been set, it lights before the delay.

Status table

Status PC screen type

Sensor operation indicator light Input Output

PWR/ERR OUT TRIG External trigger

Switch programs

External master image registration

Clear Error BUSY

Total Status / Total status NG / Each tool / Each logic /

Pos.Adj. *1RUN Error

Running *2

Waiting for a trigger

- Lighting (green)

*3OFF ¡ ¡ ¡

Í

OFF*4

ON OFFJudgment processing *5

*6

*7 *8

ONSwitching programs*9 OFF

*10 *11*12

Registering the external master image *11 *10

Setting

During threshold adjustment on the Test screen Test Blink

(green) OFF *5¡

Í Í Í

Same as while running

OFFOFF

OFFTrigger Options, Master Registration, etc.

LiveFocus Adjustment (MF) OFF *14 OFFAutomatically adjusting brightnessAutomatically adjusting the focus (AF)

Blink (green) OFF

*13Í

*13

Setup Adjustment *15 OFFI/O Monitor

- OFF*16 ← ← ← ← ← ←

Others Í Í Í Í OFF OFF OFF

Error

Trigger errorRunning -

Blink (red) Same as normal Same as normal ¡ Same as normalON

Setting LiveExternal master registration error

-System error Lighting (red) OFF OFF Í Í Í Í

OFF OFFOFF

Startup memory readout error *17 *17 *17


A

Status Table

*6 Disregards the input. A trigger error occurs.*7 Stops the judgment process and switches.*8 Stops the judgment process and registers the previous taken image as a master image.*9 Turns off the light before the process is completed. Until the light turns off, the previous status result

will be displayed.*10 After the current process is completed, generates the new input.*11 Do not use. The processing order becomes indeterminate.*12 Turns OFF before the process is completed. Outputs the previous status result until this turns OFF.*13 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image will be updated. The Busy output operates.*14 The flashing cycle of the orange light changes by linking to the focus indicator. The STATUS indicator

light operates in the same way.*15 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image is updated.*16 While the I/O monitor function is used, only the operation of the I/O lines is confirmed. The assigned

functions will not operate.*17 The NPN open collector output turns OFF regardless of the output settings (N.O./N.C.) and the

polarity (NPN/PNP) settings.

Additionally, refer to “Chapter 8 Controlling with Input/Output Line” (Page 8-1).“Chapter 8 Controlling with Input/Output Line” (Page 8-1)..

Status table

Status PC screen type

Sensor operation indicator light Input Output

PWR/ERR OUT TRIG External trigger

Switch programs

External master image registration

Clear Error BUSY

Total Status / Total status NG / Each tool / Each logic /

Pos.Adj. *1RUN Error

Running *2

Waiting for a trigger

- Lighting (green)

*3OFF ¡ ¡ ¡

Í

OFF*4

ON OFFJudgment processing *5

*6

*7 *8

ONSwitching programs*9 OFF

*10 *11*12

Registering the external master image *11 *10

Setting

During threshold adjustment on the Test screen Test Blink

(green) OFF *5¡

Í Í Í

Same as while running

OFFOFF

OFFTrigger Options, Master Registration, etc.

LiveFocus Adjustment (MF) OFF *14 OFFAutomatically adjusting brightnessAutomatically adjusting the focus (AF)

Blink (green) OFF

*13Í

*13

Setup Adjustment *15 OFFI/O Monitor

- OFF*16 ← ← ← ← ← ←

Others Í Í Í Í OFF OFF OFF

Error

Trigger errorRunning -

Blink (red) Same as normal Same as normal ¡ Same as normalON

Setting LiveExternal master registration error

-System error Lighting (red) OFF OFF Í Í Í Í

OFF OFFOFF

Startup memory readout error *17 *17 *17


A

Status Table

Displaying and outputting the status result

StatusJudgment of each tool Total Status *2 Total Status

NGDisplay

Output Display Output OutputJudgment Matching rate *1

Waiting for a trigger(Not judged) *3 -- --- OFF -- OFF OFF

Judge is OK OK 0 to 100 ON*4 *5

Judge is NG NG 0 to 100 OFFUnable to judge *6 -- --- OFF *6 OFF ON

*1 When the setting scale is changed by the Color Area/Area tool, 0 to 200/0 to 999 can be selected. The cut-off process (Page A-5) may be performed for the outline tool and the position adjustment tool.*2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. “Setting the Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-63)*3 In this status, there is no trigger input after the power turned ON, after the program number has

changed, or after a shift from the setting mode to the run mode.*4 When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.*5 When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.*6 The judgment of position adjustment tool cannot be determined if the judgment of each tool cannot be

determined at the time of using the position adjustment tool. For details, refer to “Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment” (Page A-4).

Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment

Position adjustment

resultWindow

protrusion *1 Display/outputJudgment of each tool

Total Status *2

Total Status NGPos. Adj. Outline Color Area/

Area

Succeeded

NoView judgment OK OK/NG OK/NG

*3Status output ON ON/OFF ON/OFF *4

View matching rate 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 *5

YesView judgment OK OK/NG -- *6

*3Status output ON ON/OFF OFF *4

View matching rate 0 to 100 0 to 100 *7 --- *6

FailedView judgment NG -- -- NGStatus output OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

View matching rate 0 to 100 --- ---

*1 This is an operation for if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the imaging area (Page 4-17) at the time of position adjustment succeeded.

*2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. “Setting the Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-63)*3 When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.*4 When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.*5 0 to 200/0 to 999 can be selected when the setting scale has been changed.*6 For details of the target’s outline which is protruded from the search region, refer to “Matching rate

at the time of protrusion” (Page A-5)*7 The judgment cannot be determined if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the

imaging area.


A

Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool

Matching rate at the time of protrusion

zz When the search region is “Entire”When the target outline protrudes from the imaging area, the protruding outline is excluded from the target for calculating the matching rate.The matching rate decreases in proportion to the protrusion amount.

Protruding outline(excluded from the target for calculating the matching rate)

Outline to be targeted for calculating the matching rate

Tool window

Imaging area

zz When the search region is “Partial”The sensor searches the outline of the target that is in the search region. The matching rate of the target being out of search region will be “0”. If the target is being protruded from the imaging area, the matching rate will decrease depends on how much the target is protruded from the imaging area.

The above behavior is the case that the version of the sensor operation software is R1.10 or later.For the version R1.00, the matching rate decreases in proportion to the protrusion amount.

When the tool window after position adjustment is protruded from the imaging area, the judgment display of the Color Area/Area tool becomes -- (Unable to judge) and the status output turns OFF.

Cut-off process of the matching rateCut-off process means the process where the outline detection process is ended when no outline exceeding a certain matching rate (cut-off value) below the threshold value is found.A matching rate which has been cut off becomes 0. Because the cut-off value is linked to the threshold, the cut-off value is also changed when the threshold is changed.

Current matching rate

ThresholdMatching rate(Cut-off value)

Cut-off processing range(Range where the matching rate becomes 0)

Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool


A

Settings List

Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup) screen

1 Image Optimization

Menu Description Setting range Reference page

Trigger Options Select a type of the timing to start imaging.

Internal TriggerTrigger interval:1 to 10,000 ms(default value: 50ms)External TriggerTrigger delay:0 to 1,000 ms(default value: 0ms)

4-8

Brightness Adjustment

Automatic Brightness Adjustment

Automatically adjusts a light intensity of the light and a shutter speed.

- 4-11

Imaging Mode Select an imaging mode of the sensor.

yNormal (default value) yHDR yHigh Gain

4-11

Exposure Time Displays a current exposure time. - 4-11

BrightnessManually adjusts a light intensity of the built-in light and a shutter speed.

Standard range type (color)1 to 100Standard range type (monochrome)1 to 120Short range type1 to 120Long rang type1 to 100

4-11

UndoResets the image taken by the sensor to the state before brightness adjustment.

- 4-11

Focus Adjustment Adjusts focus of the sensor.

Manual focusing type-Auto focusing type

yAutomatic yManual

4-13

Extended Functions

Imaging Area

Imaging Area Sets an imaging area. yEntire yPartial 4-17

Digital Zoom(Monochrome type only)

Switches the digital zoom to ON/OFF.

yOFF (default value) yON 4-18

UndoResets the sensor to the state before the settings were changed.

- 4-16

Color Filters(Color type only)

Applies the color filters if an outline of a certain color cannot be displayed when an image is displayed in monochrome display by the color type sensor.

Unused (default value) / Red / Green / Blue / Cyan / Magenta / Yellow

4-18

LightingLighting Switches to ON/OFF for

the built-in light. yON (default value) yOFF 4-19

Lighting Mode Select a lighting mode for the built-in light.

yFlash (default value) yContinuous 4-19

Settings List


A

Settings List

2 Master RegistrationMenu Description Setting range Reference

page

Master Registration

Register Live image as masterRegisters the image imaged by sensor as a master image.

- 4-21

Register image from image history

Registers an image history stored in the sensor as a master image.

- 4-22

Register image from file location

Registers the image file (*.iva or *.ivp) as a master image.

- 4-23

Extended Functions Brightness Correction

Sets a reference of brightness to the master image.

ySettings yDelete yTest

4-25

3 Tool SettingsItems Description Setting range Reference

pageAdd Tool Newly sets a tool. - 4-31

Outline

Edit Window

Window Shape

Select the window shape to specify the area of a target to be detected.

yRect (default value) yCircle 4-35

Search Region

Specifies an area to search an outline of the target. By specifying a smaller area as a search area, the processing time will be shortened.

yEntire (for no position adjustment) yPartial

4-37

Fine Tune Outline

SensitivityAn extraction sensitivity of an outline can be selected according to the target.

yHigh Sensitivity yNormal Sensitivity (default value) y Low Sensitivity

4-37

Remove Outline

Judges by disabling the unnecessary outlines which interrupt the stabilized detection.

yUndo yRedo yClear ySize

4-38

Limit Adjustment

Match Adjusts a threshold used in the OK/NG judgment. 0 to 100 (default value: 70) 4-35

Live Adjustment

Displays the Test screen and adjusts a threshold. - 4-35

Tool name Sets an arbitrary name to the tool. - 4-38

Extended Functions

Rotation Range

Sets a range of rotating direction to search an outline of the target.

0 to ±180°(default value: ± 20°) 4-39

MarginSelect whether or not to allow the margin for the limited angle.

yON (default value) yOFF 4-40

Search Algorithm

Select a detection mode of outline tool according to the target.

yHigh Accuracy (default value) yHigh Speed

4-40


A

Settings List

Items Description Setting range Reference page

Color A

rea/Area

Edit WindowSelect the window shape to specify an area of the target to be extracted.

yRect (default value) yCircle yEntire

4-44

Angle ResetWhen the window shape is set to [Rect], resets an angle of the window.

- -

Mask

Add MaskAdds of a circular/rectangular mask region in the tool window frame. yRect (default value)

yCircle

4-47

Cut MaskAdds a circular/rectangular mask region for cutting the set mask region.

4-47

Undo The previous operation can be cancelled. - 4-47

Clear Deletes a mask region which has been set. - 4-47

Color Extraction(For color type)

Click a color to be extracted on the master image and sets an extraction range.

yExtract Area [+] yExtract Area [-] yUndo yClear y to Live Image

4-44

Brightness Extraction(For monochrome type)

Click brightness to be extracted on the master image and sets an extraction range.

yBrightness Range yUndo yClear y to Live Image

4-44

Limit Adjustment

Match Adjusts a threshold used in the OK/NG judgment. 0 to 100 (default value: 50) 4-44

Upper Limit

Set an upper limit of the threshold.

yON yOFF (default value) 4-48

ScaleWhen an upper limit setting is ON, select a threshold scale.

y 0 to 200 (default value) y 0 to 999 4-48

Live Adjustment


Tool name Sets an arbitrary name to the tool. - 4-49

Extended Functions

Advanced Color Extraction(Color type only)

Specifies a color to be extracted as HSB (H: Hue, S: Saturation, B: Brightness).

yH : 0 to 359 yS : 0 to 255 yB : 0 to 255

4-51

to Live Image

Based on a set color extraction value, a color extraction condition can be confirmed in the Live image.

- 4-51

Fixed Reference Area

Select a condition which the matching rate of the Color Area/Area is 100%.

yDisable yEnable: Large yEnable: Small

4-51


A

Settings List

Items Description Setting range Reference page

Position A

djustment

Edit Window

Window Shape

Select a window shape to specify a range of the target to be the position adjustment reference.

yRect (default value) yCircle 4-55

Search Region

Specifies an area to search a target to be a position adjustment reference. By specifying a smaller area as a search area, the processing time will be shortened.

yEntire (for no position adjustment) yPartial

4-57

Fine Tune Outline

SensitivityAn extraction sensitivity of an outline can be selected according to a target.

yHigh Sensitivity yNormal Sensitivity (default value) y Low Sensitivity

4-57

Remove Outline

Unnecessary outlines which interrupts the steady position adjustments can be disabled.

yUndo yRedo yClear ySize

4-58

Limit Adjustment

MatchAdjusts a threshold which judges whether the position adjustment is succeeded or failed.

0 to 100 (default value: 70) 4-55

Live Adjustment


Extended Functions

Rotation Range

Sets a range to adjust a position to the rotating direction.

0 to ±180°(default value: ± 20°) 4-59

MarginSelect whether or not to allow the margin for the limited angle.

yON (default value) yOFF 4-59

Edit Edits settings of the tool which has already been set. - 4-31

Copy

Copies a tool which has been set and pastes it to the same position.This is for Outline tool and Color Area/Area tool.

- 4-32

Delete Deletes an unnecessary tool. - 4-32


A

Settings List

4 Output AssignmentMenu Description Setting range Reference

page

OUT1 to OUT4Sets the output items to be assigned to the output line.

yTotal Status yTotal Status NG yRUN yBUSY yError yPosition Adjustment yTool 01 to 16 y Logic 1 to 4 yOFF (not used)

4-61

Trigger ErrorSelects whether to enable/disable the output when the trigger error occurred.

yValid y Invalid (default value) 4-61

Extended Functions

Total Status Conditions Selects a condition for the total status result.

yAll Tools OK yAny Tools OK y Logic 1 to 4

4-63

Logic Settings(Logic 1 to 4)

Logic Selects the logical operation method of logics.

yAND yOR 4-64

(Tool selection) Select tools to be assigned to the logic.

y Unused y Used y Used (Inverse)

4-64


A

Settings List

Program Details screen


CopyCopies the selected program to unregistered program.

- 6-12

Import from FileImports a program from the batch backup file (*.iva).

- 6-13

Initialize Initializes the program settings. - 6-14

(Program list) Displays the program list. PROG_00 to PROG_31 6-11

(Master image)Displays the master image of the currently selected program.

- 6-11

Edit Edits a program name. - 6-12

(Tool list)Displays the tools that are registered in the selected program.

- 6-11

Change Program Changes to the selected program - 6-9


A

Settings List

I/O Settings screen


Input

Input Assignment

IN1Sets a detection timing of the trigger input for IN1 input line.

yExt. Trigger Rising (default value) yExt. Trigger Falling

6-26

IN2 to IN6 Sets a function to the input line IN2 to IN6.

yOFF (default value) yProgram bit0 to bit4 yClear Error yExt. Master Save

6-26

Option

Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save?

Sets whether or not to write data into the ROM when the external master image registration is performed.


Enable program switching through external input

Sets whether to enable/disable the external input switch programs function.


Output

Output Type OUT1 to OUT4 Sets the output line

settings (OUT1 to 4). yN.O. yN.C. 6-27

Output Type Selects the output mode. y Latching (default value) yOne-Shot 6-27

I/O Monitor

Input MonitorDisplays an input state of external input in real time.

- 6-28

Output TestConfirms whether or not each OUT output is correctly output.

OFFON (default value) 6-28

I/O Polarity Switches the polarity of the sensor.

NPNPNP 6-28


A

Settings List

Advanced screen


Environmental

Device SettingsDisplays a device name and MAC address of the sensor.

6-31

Device Name Changes the device name.

Device name : 16 characters 6-31

Change Network Settings

Changes the network settings of the sensor. - 6-32

IP Address Displays the IP address of the sensor. 6-32

Subnet Mask

Displays the subnet mask of the sensor.

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 6-32

Default Gateway

Displays the default gateway of the sensor.

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 6-32

PORT Displays the port number of the sensor. 63000 (default value) 6-32

Field Network

Protocol Selects the communication protocol for the sensor.

yDisable yEtherNet/IP yPROFINET

6-33

Handshake Control

Enables/disables the handshake control of data.

yEnable yDisable 6-33

Security

Password Lock Sets the security of the sensor.


Password, Enter password for confirmation

Inputs a password when the password lock is turned on.

- 6-34

Undo Resets to the state before the new password was set. - 6-34

Auto Focus Adjustment Position

Sets whether or not to make the adjusting position for the auto focus common to all programs.

y Individual (default value) yCommon

6-35


A

Settings List


FTP

FTP ClientTransfers the image data and status result information of the sensor memory to an FTP server.


FTP Destination Settings

IP Address Displays the IP address of the FTP server. - 6-36

Port Number Displays the port number. - 6-36

User Name Input the user name for logging in to the FTP server.

Up to 16 characters can be set. 6-36

Password Input the password for logging in to the FTP server.


Passive Mode

Enables/disables the passive mode.


Connection Test

Tests the connection with the FTP server. - 6-37

Transfer Condition

Transfer Condition

Selects the transfer condition of image data.

yAll yNG Only 6-37

File Format Selects the file saving format for image data.

y IVP yBMP 6-37

Transfer Judgment Results

Transfers judgement results simultaneously with the image data.


FTP ErrorTurns ON the Error output function for when a file transfer failed.


Transfer Destination Folder Settings

Folder Displays the transfer destination folder.


File NameSets the file name of the image data to be transferred.


Index Upper Limit

Input the upper limit of the numbers to be appended to file names.

0-65535 6-39

Create Subfolder

Creates subfolders under the transfer destination folder.



A

Settings List


Setup Adjustment

Tilt CorrectionShapes can be adjusted to the correct shape if a displayed image is distorted.


Adjustment Condition Settings

Sets the adjustment conditions of a tilt correction.

yVertical (default value) yHorizontal

6-40

Image Settings Adjusts imaging for theTilt Correction.

Same as Image Optimization 6-40

White BalanceAdjusts a white balance for the built-in camera of the sensor.

yOFF (default value) yON

6-42

White Balance Settings Adjusts a white balance. - 6-42

Image Settings Adjusts imaging for the White balance.

Same as Image Optimization 6-42

Image Display Direction Changes a display direction of an image.

yNormal (default value) yRotate 180°

6-43

Backup

Batch BackupBacks up the data saved in the sensor to the PC in a batch.

- 6-21

Transfer Program SettingsTransfers the settings data (batch backup file) saved in the PC to the sensor.

- 6-23

Setting Transfer Options

Transfers the I/O polarity, network settings and device name simultaneously with the settings data transfer.

yEnable (disabled after the transfer) yDisabled (default value)

6-23

Initialize/Update

Initialize Sensor Initializes the sensor settings. - 3-10

Update Sensor Updates the operation software of the sensor. - 6-44

Sensor Information

Displays the model, version, serial number, MAC address, IP address, and device name of the sensor.

- 6-44


A

Troubleshooting

Symptom Check point Remedy Reference page

The PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor is lighting or blinking in red.

An error occurred. Check the errors for lighting or blinking in red.

Refer to "Error Message".A-19

The power of the sensor does not turn on.

Is the power cable correctly connected?

Connect the power cable correctly. 2-8

Is the voltage or capacity of the power source met the specification?

Use a power source of the correct rating. 9-2

An image is not displayed on the IV-Navigator, or the image is abnormal.

Is the installed distance of the target correct?

Place a target at the correct installed distance. The installed distance is depending on the sensor type.

2-2

Is the sensor view correct?Place the sensor in such a way that the sensor view matches the target size.

2-2

Is the focus adjustment correct? Adjust the focusing position (focus) of the sensor. 4-13

Is the brightness adjustment correct?

Adjust brightness of the sensor. 4-11

Is the target or the sensor vibrating?

Devise anti-vibration measures etc. -

Does the ambient light affect the image?

Use brightness correction. 4-25

Place the douser to prevent the incident of ambient light. -

Is the front cover dirty or damaged?

Clean the front cover. Replace it with the spare front cover (OP-87461).

A-36

Is the function of Update Image in the RUN mode set to [OFF]?

Set the function of Update Image in the RUN mode to [ON]. 6-48

The image or the status result is not updated.

Is the system in the setting mode?

yStart the run mode yTurn on the power of the sensor again.

5-2

Is the trigger correctly input?

If a target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger. When the NPN is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a non-voltage input circuit. When the PNP is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a voltage input circuit. Check the cables.

2-8

All or part of the settings necessary for running have not been completed.

Complete the settings in Settings Navigator. 4-1

Troubleshooting


A

Troubleshooting


The status result is displayed but the image is not.

Is the function of Update Image in the RUN mode set to [OFF]?

Set the function of Update Image in the RUN mode to [ON].

6-48

Image update is slow.(during operation/settings)

Is the network connected to the in-plant LAN?

The network may be affected by the traffic in the in-plant LAN. Configure a local network and confirm the network connection only for the IV Series.

-

Set the function of Update Image in the RUN mode to OFF.

6-48

IV-Navigator is not operated.

Is the input screen for the unlock password displayed?

The password lock of the sensor is enabled. Input the unlock password.

6-34

The password is lost and cannot unlock.

Contact your nearest KEYENCE office. -

The status result is not output.

Is the output line correctly connected?

Correctly connect to the control unit. 2-8

Is the output setting correctly set?

Set the output line and output settings correctly in the Settings Navigator.

4-60

Is the system in the setting mode?

Start the run mode 5-2

Is the threshold correctly set? Set the threshold correctly. 5-14

Is the tool correctly set? ySet the detection tool correctly. ySet the position adjustment tool correctly.

4-30

Is the Polarity correctly set?Set the NPN or PNP according to the circuits of the control unit.

6-28

Are the N.O. and N.C. correctly set?

Set the N.O. (normally open) or N.C. (normally closed) according to the circuits of the control unit.

6-27


A

Troubleshooting


An external trigger cannot be input.

Is the trigger condition set to [External Trigger]?

Select [External Trigger] in Trigger Options. 4-10

Is the input line correctly connected?


Has the input setting been made correctly set?

Make the input line and input settings correctly in [Input Settings].

6-26

Has the Polarity been correctly set?

When the NPN is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a non-voltage input circuit. When the PNP is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a voltage input circuit. Check the cables.

6-28

The program number cannot be changed with the input line.

Has the switching method for the programs been correctly set?

Place the check mark to the “Enable program switching through external input” check box.

6-26

Has the input line been correctly connected?


Has the input setting been correctly set?

Set the input line and input settings correctly in [Input Settings].

6-26

Has the Polarity been correctly set?

When the NPN is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a non-voltage input circuit. When the PNP is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a voltage input circuit. Check the cables.

6-28

IV-Navigator cannot be connect with sensor. Check the cables and settings.

Refer to “Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor”.

A-25

Image data cannot be transferred via FTP. Check the cables and settings. Refer to “Remedy when data

transfer via FTP is unavailable” A-33


A

Error Messages

Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensorThe causes of, and remedies for, an error can be checked by observing the indicator light of the sensor.

PWR/ERR indicator light

PWR/ERR indicator status Cause Remedy

GreenON In operation. -

Blink Setting in progress.Operation stopped. -

Red

ON

A system error occurred. yTurn on the power of this device. y If the same error occurs, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

A startup memory read error occurred.

yA data abnormality occurred due to noise or because the power switched OFF while writing was in progress.

y Initialize the settings. y If the same error occurs, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

Blink

A trigger error occurred.A judgment process is not performed.

y If a target is to be imaged using an external trigger, the external trigger will be input during a BUSY status. y If a target is to be imaged using an internal trigger, the trigger interval will become shorter than the processing time.

yThe trigger error can be fixed using one of the following procedures.

yNext normal trigger input yClear Error input ySwitching the program number yProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor

yDo not input an external trigger during a BUSY status. ySet the trigger interval of the internal trigger to a value that is longer than the processing time. yAn error will not occur if the trigger is set to [Disable] described in output assignment for the Settings Navigator (Page 4-60).

An external master image registration error (without registered master image) occurred. The master image is not updated.

yThe image to be registered as a master image was not imaged. yThe work memory is insufficient.

yAn external master image registration error can be fixed using one of the following procedures.

ySuccessful next external master image registration yClearing the Error input ySwitching the program number yProceeding to the settings screen for sensor

yTaking an image to be registered as a master image and register it as an external master image. yDeleting one or more detection tools.

Error Messages


A

Error Messages

PWR/ERR indicator status Cause Remedy

Red Blink

The external master image registration error (with registered master image) occurred. The following errors occurred even though the image was updated and registered as a master image.

yFor the new master image, the outline cannot be extracted with the outline tool. yFor the new master image, the area cannot be extracted with the Color Area/Area tool.


ySuccessful next external master image registration yClearing the Error input ySwitching the program number yProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor

yChecking that the image to be registered and the detection tools/position adjustment settings are applicable.

An FTP error occurred. The following errors occurred.

yConnection with the FTP server failed. yTranfer to the transfer destination folder failed. yThe transfer speed could not catch up the sensor processing speed.

An FTP error can be fixed using one of the following procedures.

yClick the [OK] button on the Error screen. yClear Error input. yResolve the causes of transfer failure.

OFF

y Power is not supplied to this device. yDuring focusing position adjustment. (Manual focus type only)

yConnect the power cable correctly. yUse a power source of the correct rating. yComplete the focusing position adjustment.

Errors in a state that the PWR/ERR indicator light lights in red or blinks in red turn the error output ON. “Cables” (Page 2-8)“Cables” (Page 2-8) “4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)


A

Error Messages

Confirming error messages of the IV-Navigator

Message Cause Remedy Output/ Indicator

Sensor system error happens.

Turn on sensor.If not turned on, contact local service center.

A system error occurred in the sensor.

y It is conceivable that a fault occurred inside the sensor.

yTurn on the power of the sensor again. y If the same error occurs, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

*1

Sensor internal memory reading has failed.

Turn on or initialize sensor.

After this message is closed, [Initialize] button will be displayed.

A memory read error occurred when the sensor started.

yA data trouble occurred. y It is conceivable that the power was switched OFF during writing, or noise was picked up.

y Initialize the settings following the instructions on the screen. yTurn on the power of the sensor again. yDo not turn OFF the power while saving the settings. y If the same error occurs, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

*1

Sensor program xx is damaged. Initialization is necessary.

[Initialize] button will be displayed.

A memory read error occurred when the sensor started.

yA data trouble occurred during the execution of program number xx. y It is conceivable that the power was switched OFF during writing, or noise was picked up.

y Initialize the settings following the instructions on the screen. yTurn on the power of the sensor again. yDo not turn OFF the power while saving the settings. y If the same error occurs, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

*1

Trigger error A trigger error occurred. Judgment processing has not been executed.

y If a target is to be imaged using an external trigger, the external trigger will be input during a BUSY status. y If a target is to be imaged using an internal trigger, the trigger interval will become shorter than the processing time.

yAn trigger error can be fixed using one of the following procedures.

yNext normal trigger input yClearing the Error input ySwitching the program number yProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor

yDo not input the external trigger during a BUSY status. ySet the trigger interval of the internal trigger to a value that is longer than the processing time. yAn error will not occur if the trigger is set to [Disable] described in output assignment for the Settings Navigator (Page 4-60).

*2


A

Error Messages


Some tools can not correctly judge because of insufficient outline extraction amount as a result of “Ext. Master Save”. (Matching rate is 0.)Check tool configuration.

An external master image registration error (with registered master image) occurred. The following errors occurred even though the image was updated and registered as a master image.

yFor the new master image, the outline cannot be extracted with the outline tool. yFor the new master image, the area cannot be extracted with the Color Area/Area tool. yThe brightness correction cannot be performed correctly for the new master image.


ySuccessful next external master image registration yClearing the Error input ySwitching the program number yProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor

yChecking that the image to be registered and the detection tools/position adjustment settings are applicable. yAdjusting brightness of the image to be registered properly.

*2

Some tools can not correctly judged because area is 0 as a result of “Ext. Master Save”. (Matching rate is 0.)Check tool configuration.

Brightness of brightness adjustment area is not adjustable as a result of “Ext. Master Save”. Check configuration of brightness adjustment.

Outer master registration fails because image is not captured.

An external master image registration error (with no registered master image) occurred. The master image is not updated.

yThe image to be registered as a master image was not imaged. yThe work memory is insufficient.


ySuccessful in next external master image registration yClearing the Error input ySwitching the program number yProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor

yTaking an image to be registered as a mater image and registering it as an external master image. yDeleting one or more detection tools.

*2

Outer master registration fails because of lack of work memory.

Application error happens. An application failure occurred.

yReinstall the IV-Navigator (IV-H1). yReplace the PC. y If the same error occurs, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

Registry access fails. A failure of the registry information occurred.

yRestart the PC. yReinstall the IV-Navigator (IV-H1).


A

Error Messages


Network adapter not found yEthernet cable is not connected to the PC. yThe network adapter is not correctly connected to the PC.

Refer to “Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor” (Page A-25).

Sensor not found Searching the sensor failed.

Data transfer to sensor fails. Connection is not possible because data transmission to the sensor failed.

Communication timeout to sensor happens.

Connection is not possible because there is no response from the sensor.

Network connection to sensor can not be performed.

Connection is not possible because the IV-Navigator is not correctly connected with the sensor.

Network connection to sensor can not be performed.

Connection is not possible because the connection is not correctly nor directly connected with the sensor.

Specified sensor is being connected to other monitor or PC.

Connection is not possible because the specified sensor is connected to a different monitor or a different PC.Only one monitor or PC can be connected to a sensor at the same time.

Disconnect the presently connected monitor or PC and then re-connect it.

Writing in file fails. Saving the file to the specified saving destination has failed.

ySpecify the saving destination correctly. yConfirm the access privileges of the saving destination.

Access to file or folder fails. Accessing to the specified file or folder failed.

yConfirm the access privileges of the saving destination. yChange the attribute of the read-only folder.

Disk space is insufficient. Saving is not possible because the amount of free space in the specified saving destination is insufficient.

Delete a file to make an enough space for the saving destination.

This file configuration data is for xxxx.This file is not readable.

The setting files for a different model of the sensors cannot be read.

Read the setting files of a sensor of the same model.


A

Error Messages


FTP Connection Error Connection with the FTP server failed.

Refer to “Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable” (Page A-33).

*2

FTP Transfer Error (Transfer Failed)

Data transfer to the transfer destination folder failed.

FTP Transfer Error (Insufficient Data Buffer)

Data which is larger than the remaining storage of the FTP buffer has been created and the transfer failed.

*1 Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Lighting (red), PWR indicator light of the monitor: Lighting (red)

*2 Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Blinking (red), PWR indicator light of the monitor: Blinking (red)


A

Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor

Remedy when direct connection is unavailable

Status Remedy

Connection is not possible even by clicking the [Direct Connection] button in the Activation Menu.

yClick the [OK] button and close the message. yMount the network adapter correctly to the PC. ySet any IP address for the PC. Automatic IP address acquisition cannot be applied.

“Changing the PC settings (IP address setting)” (Page 2-16)

ySupply the power to the sensor. yConnect the sensor and the PC correctly and directly with an Ethernet cable.

“Connecting directly” (Page 2-11)Click the [Connection start] button after a correct connection. yRestart the PC and turn on the sensor power again. If the problem is not solved using one of the above remedies, reset (initialize) the sensor network settings.

“Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)” (Page A-35)

Connection became impossible after connection was established once.

The network is connected to multiple sensors or computers and other network devices.

yClick the [OK] button and close the message. yConnect the sensor and the PC correctly and directly with an Ethernet cable.

“Connecting directly” (Page 2-11)“Connecting directly” (Page 2-11)Click the [Connection start] button after correct connection. y In the case of a network connection, change the configuration to network connection.




A


Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable

Status Remedy

Connection is not possible even by clicking the [Network Connection] button in the Activation Menu. yClick the [OK] button and close the message.

yMount the network adapter correctly to the PC. ySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment. yCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment.

“Connecting via network” (Page 2-11)“Connecting via network” (Page 2-11) yClick the [Search Sensor] button and search a sensor.

“Searching for a sensor to be connected” (Page 3-7)“Searching for a sensor to be connected” (Page 3-7)If a connection is unavailable, refer to “When the connection cannot be established by searching the sensor” (Page A-27). y Input the IP address of the sensor to be connected and click the [Connection start] button to connect.

“Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address” (Page 3-8)

If a connection is unavailable, refer to “When the connection cannot be established by specifying the sensor” (Page A-28).

Connection is not possible even by clicking the [Connection start] button in the Network connection screen.

Connection became impossible after connection was established once.


A


Status Remedy

The sensor was not found using the [Search Sensor] button on the Network connection screen.

When the connection cannot be established by searching the sensor

ySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment. yCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment.

“Connecting via network” (Page 2-11)“Connecting via network” (Page 2-11) yConfirm that the IP address of the PC does not coincide with that of the sensor or another device. Also, correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway.

“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the PC” (Page A-31) yChange to direct connection and confirm that the IP address of the sensor does not coincide with that of the PC or another device. Also, reset (initialize) the network setting for the sensor.


“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor” (Page A-31)


yThe following conditions are required for a successful sensor search.

yThe subnet masks of the sensor and PC are matched. yThe sensor network setting is not set or the IP address is not duplicated.


A


Status Remedy

Connection is not possible even by inputting the IP address into the Network connection screen and clicking the [Connection start] button.

When the connection cannot be established by specifying the sensor

ySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment. yCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment.

“Connecting via network” (Page 2-11) ySpecify the correct IP address of the sensor. y If the sensor IP address has not been set, connect by the [Search Sensor] button.

“Searching for a sensor to be connected” (Page 3-7)“Searching for a sensor to be connected” (Page 3-7) yConfirm that the IP address of the PC does not coincide with that of the sensor or another device. Also, correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway.

“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the PC” (Page A-31) yChange to direct connection and confirm that the IP address of the sensor does not coincide with that of the PC or another device. Also, correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway.Also, reset (initialize) the network setting for the sensor.


“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor” (Page A-31)



A


Confirming the status by observing the indicator light of the sensorThe causes of an unavailable connection and countermeasures can be confirmed by checking the LINK/ACT indicator light and STATUS indicator light of the sensor..

LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator lightDisplays the link status with the network.

LINK/ACT indicator light

Status of the LINK/ACT

indicator lightStatus Remedy

Green

ON Correct link with the PC or the Ethernet switch.

Link is normal.When connection with the IV-Navigator is not possible, check the STATUS indicator light.Blink

Correct link with the PC or the Ethernet switch.Data are being sent and received.

OFF

No correct linking with the PC or the Ethernet switch.

yPower is not supplied to this unit or the connection target. yThe cable is not connected correctly.

ySupply power to the sensor. ySupply power to the PC or the Ethernet switch of the connection target. yConnect the cable correctly.


A


STATUS indicator lightIndicates the connection status within the IV-Navigator.Confirm that the LINK/ACT indicator light is green (lighting) or green (blinking) and then check the STATUS indicator light.

STATUS indicator light

Status of the STATUS

indicator lightStatus Remedy

Green

ON

Correct connection with the IV-Navigator.The connection with the IV-Navigator has been established by acquiring the IP address.

-

Blink

No correct connection with the monitor.The IP address of the sensor has been acquired, but connection with the IV-Navigator has not been established.

For direct connection “Remedy when direct connection is unavailable” (Page A-25)

For network connection “Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable” (Page A-26)

OFF

No correct connection with the PC.The IP address of the sensor has not been acquired.

For direct connection “Remedy when direct connection is unavailable” (Page A-25)

For network connection “Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable” (Page A-26)

yThe communication timeout time is 1 minute. yDuring the timeout interval after trouble has occurred, the screen may fail to be updated or may not accept an operation with the STATUS indicator light turned on. yDuring the timeout interval, devices other than the previously connected PC cannot be connected.


A


Other methods of confirming a network connection

Confirming the existence of the sensor from the PC

Whether or not the sensor is correctly connected can be confirmed by sending a ping command from the PC to the sensor to be connected.

1 Select [All Programs] → [Accessories] → [Command Prompt] from the [Start] menu of Windows.The Command Prompt screen opens.

2 Input "ping∆(IP address of the sensor)" (∆ indicates a "space") and press the <Enter> key.

3 Confirm the sent result of the ping command.

zz If correctly connected with a target sensorThe responded time from the sensor (input IP address) will be displayed, and [0% loss] will be displayed.For Windows XP, [0% loss] will be displayed.

zz If not connected with a target sensorA message which indicates a failure for sending the ping command will be displayed, and [100% loss] will be displayed.For Windows XP, [100% loss] will be displayed.

4 After the confirmation, close the Command Prompt screen.

yNote that when the ping command is executed to a device other than a sensor, the confirmation will succeed if there is a response to the ping command. yConfirmation is not possible for a direct connection.

Confirming/Setting the IP address of the PC yFor details of confirming/setting the IP address of the PC, refer to “Changing the PC settings (IP address setting)” (Page 2-16). yConfirm that the IP address of the PC/sensor/other network device does not coincide with. Also, confirm that the subnet mask and default gateway are correctly set.

Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor

Directly connect the sensor and the PC, and confirm the IP address of the sensor.After returned to the network connection, set the confirmed IP address of the sensor and confirm whether the connection with the sensor is possible or not.

1 Directly connect the sensor and the PC of the confirmation/setting target.

“Connecting directly” (Page 2-11)“Connecting directly” (Page 2-11) “Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Direct Connection)” (Page 3-6)

2 Click the [Program] button.


3 Click the [OK] button.The IV-Navigator switches to the main screen in [Program].


A



The Advanced Sensor Settings screen opens.

5 Select the [Environmental] tab and click the [Change Network Settings] button.

Network setting screen opens.

6 Confirm the IP address of the sensor.

yWhen the IP address of the sensor is to be changed, set the arbitrary IP address and click the [OK] button. yConfirm that the IP address of the sensor/PC/other network device does not coincide with. Also, confirm that the subnet mask and default gateway are correctly set. yWhen the [Reset] button is clicked, the setup values for the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Default Gateway] will be reset and [Empty] will be displayed. [Port:] will be 63000.

7 After confirmation/setting are completed, click the [OK] button and exit from the network settings.

8 Exit the IV-Navigator.

9 Connect the sensor and PC via a network. “Connecting via network” (Page 2-11) “Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Network Connection)” (Page 3-6)

Confirming the router settingsWhen a router is used, confirm that the following port is opened.Sensor : 63000 (default value)

For the setting methods of the sensor port number, refer to the following.

“Changing the network settings” (Page 6-32)“Changing the network settings” (Page 6-32)

yBOOTP is fixed as 67 or 68. yThe FTP port number can be changed on the server. It is generally 20 or 21. yConfirm the firewall software on the PC whether the port is available or not.

Confirming the firewall settings y If the Windows Security Alert dialog appears and the IV-Navigator is blocked by the Windows firewall, click the [Allow access] button (for Windows 7) or the [Unblock] button (for Windows XP). yConfirm that an application or a port to be used is being enabled in the firewall software of the PC. For the port number to be allowed to use, refer to

“Confirming the router settings” (Page A-32).


A


Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable

Status Remedy

Connection with the FTP server failed.

yConfirm the IP address of the FTP server and set it correctly. yConfirm the port number of the FTP server and set it correctly. yMoreover, confirm the firewall software on the PC whether the port is available or not. yConfirm the user name for logging in to the FTP server and set it correctly. yConfirm the password for logging in to the FTP server and set it correctly.

FTP Destination (Page 6-36)FTP Destination (Page 6-36)

Data transfer to the transfer destination folder failed.

yAuthorization for accessing the transfer destination folder is not granted. Acquire the access authorization of the transfer destination folder and perform the operation again. yConfirm that there is no file with the same name as the transfer destination folder name which has been set. If a file with the same name exists, change the file name or change the transfer destination folder.

Transfer destination folder (Page 6-36) (Page 6-36) yWhen you switched from the [Run] screen to the [Program] screen, the screen is switched to the [Program] screen after the transfer of untransferred data has finished.

If you click the [Cancel] button during the transfer, the transfer will be forcibly finished and the Error screen will appear.


A


Status Remedy

Data which is larger than the remaining storage of the FTP buffer has been created and the transfer failed.

yChange the trigger cycle of the sensor. “Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8)“Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8)

yConfirm the stress status of the network.


A

Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)

The network settings such as the IP address can be initialized to the factory default by means of the IP reset switch of the sensor.

yThe IP reset switch is used when joining the sensor used in another network to a new network, or when trouble occurs during connection. yDo not initialize a correctly connected sensor. The connection will be interrupted.

Settings after initialization

Setting Items Settings after initialization

Communication speed 100/10Mbps Automatically switches

IP address setting method

BOOTP(Bootstrap Protocol)

IP address 0.0.0.0*1, *2

Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0*2

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0*2

*1 If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, only the BOOTP client function can be used.

Do not assign an IP address from the BOOTP server or DHCP server except the IV-Navigator to be connected.

*2 Becomes blank in the Network settings screen. “Changing the network settings” (Page 6-32)“Changing the network settings” (Page 6-32)

Connecting method after initialization

z� For direct connectionConnects automatically with BOOTP. There is no need to set the IP address.


z� For network connectionSearch the sensor to be connected. A search will be made for a sensor without an IP address, set the IP address by following the instructions on the screen.

“Searching for a sensor to be connected” (Page 3-7)

Initializing the network settings

1 Remove the fixing screw of the front cover indicated by the mark.

Remove only the fixing screw of the front cover indicated by the mark. Do not remove the front cover.

mark

Indicator light

2 Insert a long and thin pin (1 to 2 mm in diameter) into the screw hole and press the IP reset switch for about 3 seconds.

Long and thin pin

The STATUS indicator light will blink twice (orange) and then turn off.The network setting is initialized.

3 Tighten the fixing screw of the front cover. yTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 N·m

Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)


A

Maintenance

Replacing the front coverThe front cover can be replaced with the optional spare front cover (OP-87461) if it became dirty or damaged.

Replace the front cover with the correct procedure by following the precautions below. Otherwise the enclosure rating (IP67) may not be maintained.

yDo not let dust or dirt stick to the O-shaped ring. yAttach the O-shaped ring on the correct position.

1 Remove the old front cover and the O-shaped ring.

O-shaped ring (small)

Dedicated screwFront cover

O-shaped ring (large)

2 Install the front cover after embedding the O-shaped ring.

yScrew: Dedicated screw × 2 Use the attached dedicated screw. yTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 N·m

O-shaped ring (small)

Dedicated screwFront cover

O-shaped ring (large)

Maintenance


A

Maintenance

MEMO


A

Index

Index

Numerics1. Image Optimization..........................................7-91. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target) ...4-62. Master Registration .......................................7-102. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment) .......4-203. Tool Settings ..................................................7-123. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets) .......4-284. Output Assignment ........................................7-134. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)...4-60

AAchieving adequate image brightness...............5-30

If brightness cannot be adjusted due to uneven brightness .......................................5-30If brightness cannot be adjusted in the Auto Brightness Adjustment ...................5-30

Achieving good focus ........................................5-31If good focus cannot be achieved by the Auto Focus Adjustment ..........................5-31

Adding a tool......................................................4-31Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a tool .............4-31Adjusting brightness ..........................................4-12Adjusting the color tint (for color type only) .......5-33Adjusting the installed distance (WD) ................5-29Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment ...................5-14Advanced screen .............................................. A-13Advanced Sensor Settings ...................... 6-49, 7-21Advanced settings for color extraction (for color type only) ............................................4-51Advanced settings for the sensor ......................6-30Area tool ............................................................4-42Auto Focus Adjustment Position (auto focus type only) ........................................6-35

BBacking up in a batch ........................................6-21Backing up the image history in a batch ............6-19[Backup] tab.......................................................6-31Basic adjustments .......................... 5-34, 5-35, 5-36Basic configurations of IV-Series .........................1-2Basic Operation Flow ..........................................3-4Basic Operation for Tools ..................................3-11Basic Operation of Simulator ...............................7-3Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator...........4-3Batch Backup .......................................... 6-44, 6-45Bracket ................................................................1-9Brightness Adjustment .......................................4-11Brightness Adjustment settings .........................4-11Brightness Correction ........................................4-25

CCables .................................................................2-8Cancelling One-Shot output ................................8-6Capture .................................................... 6-48, 7-20Changeover for a Target (Program Functions) ....6-6Change saved image file location......................6-48Changing Over ....................................................8-7Changing the logging conditions of the image history ...............................................6-20Changing the network settings ..........................6-32Changing the PC settings (IP address setting) ...2-16

For Windows 7 .............................................2-16For Windows XP ..........................................2-16

Changing the saving destination of an image....6-22Changing the timing of the status output .............8-6Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor....... A-19Checking the view and installed distance ............2-2Check Statistics/Histogram in operation ............7-19Clearing Errors ..................................................8-10Clearing the saved images ................................6-19Color Area/Area tool ..........................................4-42Color filters (color type only) ..............................4-18Communication cables .............................. 1-10, 9-8Confirming error messages of the IV-Navigator ... A-21Confirming or deleting the images registered for the Tool Auto Tuning .....................................5-26Confirming/Setting the IP address of the PC .... A-31Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor ......................................................... A-31Confirming the existence of the sensor from the PC..................................... A-31Confirming the firewall settings......................... A-32Confirming the OK/NG images ..........................5-26Confirming the registration results in the test mode .....................................................5-27Confirming the router settings .......................... A-32Confirming the saving destination of an image ...6-22Confirming the status by observing the indicator light of the sensor......................... A-29Connecting directly ............................................2-11Connecting method after initialization............... A-35

For direct connection .................................. A-35For network connection .............................. A-35

Connecting the Ethernet cable ..........................2-12Connecting the PC and multiple sensors ............1-3Connecting the PC and single sensor .................1-2Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor ....2-8Connecting the sensor and the PC....................2-11Connecting via network .....................................2-11Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers......8-2Converting IVP data to BMP data ......................6-52


A

Index

Converting IVP Data to BMP Data Using the IVP-Converter....................................6-51Copying a program ............................................6-12Copying a tool....................................................4-32Correcting the distorted images due to the installation..........................................................5-30Cut-off process of the matching rate .................. A-5

DDefault value......................................................4-61Deleting a tool....................................................4-32Deleting the OK/NG images ..............................5-26Deleting the software (uninstall) ........................2-15Description for symbols .....................................8-12Digital Zoom (monochrome type only)...............4-18Disconnect .........................................................6-47Displaying and outputting the status result ......... A-4Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment ....................... A-4Displaying from the main screen in ...................6-16Displaying from the main screen in [Run] ..........6-16Displaying the Program Details screen .............6-11Displaying the Sensor’s internal image history screen .........................................6-16Displaying the statistical information .................5-10Displaying the tool information ..........................5-12Display methods for tools ....................................5-7

For color type .................................................5-7For monochrome type ....................................5-8

Dome attachment ................................................1-8

EEditing a program name ....................................6-12Editing a tool ......................................................4-31Editing the tool window ......................................3-12Enlarging the image display ................................5-6Environmental....................................................6-31[Environmental] tab............................................6-30Error Messages ................................................ A-19Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) ....................1-10Exit........................................................... 6-46, 7-19Exiting the sensor settings and starting an operation ............................................5-2Exiting the Simulator............................................7-5Export ...................................................... 6-45, 7-18Extended Functions for the Image Optimization......................................4-16Extended Functions for the Master Registration .....................................4-25Extended Functions for the Outline tool ............4-39Extended functions for the Output Assignment ......................................4-62

Extended Functions for the Position Adjustment tool ..............................4-59Extended functions items for the Output Assignment ......................................4-62Extended Functions of the Color Area/Area tool ....................................4-50External trigger ....................................................8-2

FField Network.....................................................6-33[File] menu ............................................... 6-45, 7-18Finishing the Settings Navigator ..........................4-5Fit to Window .....................................................6-47Fixed Reference Area ........................................4-51Flow of the internal process...............................5-37Focus Adjustment ..............................................4-13Focus adjustment for the auto focusing type .....4-13Focus adjustment for the manual focusing type...................................4-14Folder composition and file naming rules ..........6-25For the processing time .....................................5-37Front cover (for replacement) ..............................1-9FTP ....................................................................6-36[FTP] tab ............................................................6-30

HHardware ...........................................................2-14[Help] menu ............................................. 6-50, 7-21Hiding the statistical information ........................5-11Hiding the tool information .................................5-13

IImage display direction ......................................6-43[Image] menu........................................... 6-47, 7-20Image Optimization............................................. A-6Image while Running .........................................6-48Imaging Area .....................................................4-17Imaging the target widely...................................5-29Importing a program ..........................................6-13Importing the individual status output of each detection tool / logic ....................................8-5Importing the Status Output.................................8-4Importing the total status / total status NG output ..........................................8-4Infrared polarization filter attachment ..................1-8Initialization ........................................................3-10Initialize Sensor ....................................... 6-44, 6-47[Initialize/Update] tab .........................................6-31Initializing a program .........................................6-14Initializing the network settings ......................... A-35Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch) .............................................. A-35


A

Index

Initializing the sensor .........................................3-10Input circuit ........................................................2-10Input Response Time.........................................8-12Input Settings.....................................................6-26Installation destination of the software (reference) .........................................................2-15Installed distance of the dome attachment ..........2-6Installing the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) .....................2-14Installing the IVP-Converter...............................6-51Installing the sensor at an angle ........................5-32Internal trigger .....................................................8-3I/O Monitor .........................................................6-28I/O Polarity .........................................................6-28I/O Settings .............................................. 6-49, 7-21I/O Settings screen ........................................... A-12Items of extended functions for the Master Registration .....................................4-25IV Sensor Simulation .........................................7-14IV Software ................................................ 1-10, 9-4

JJudgment processing flow ...................................1-6

LLanguage................................................. 6-49, 7-20Lighting ..............................................................4-19LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light .............. A-29List of the Useful Features...................................6-2Loading and confirming the saved images ........6-17

MMain screen for the Image Optimization ...... 4-7, 7-9Main screen for the Master Registration ... 4-20, 7-10Main screen for the Output Assignment .... 4-60, 7-13Main screen for the Tool settings ............. 4-30, 7-12Main screen in [Run] / [Program] .........................5-4Main screen of the IVP Converter .....................6-51Main screen of the IV Sensor Simulation ..........7-14

For Color Area/Area tool ..............................7-16For Outline/Position Adjustment tool ............7-14

Main screen of the Simulator ...............................7-6Maintenance ..................................................... A-36Manual Trigger...................................................6-48Manual trigger button.........................................6-48Margin...................................................... 4-40, 4-59Mask settings.....................................................4-47Master Registration ............................................ A-7Master registration from the image history in the sensor ..........................................................4-22

Master registration using the file saved in the PC................................................................4-23

When using batch backup files (*.iva) ..........4-23When using image capture files (*.ivp) ........4-24

Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool .................................... A-5Message when activating IV Sensor Simulator ...7-19Mounting adapter.................................................1-9Mounting the attachment .....................................2-6Mounting the dome attachment ...........................2-6Mounting the mounting adapter ...........................2-4

Mounting from the jig side ..............................2-4Mounting on the wall ......................................2-4

Mounting the Sensor ...........................................2-2Mounting the sensor onto the mounting adapter...2-4

NName and Function of Each Part ......................1-11Name and function of each part of the sensor...1-11Names and Functions of the Screen in [Run] / [Program] .................................................5-4NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable .......................9-8NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45).............................................1-10No-voltage input (When the NPN output is selected) ...................2-10

OOpen file ............................................................7-18Operating conditions..........................................2-14Operating from the menu bar ............................6-45Operating in the shortest cycle ............................8-3Operating the image tool bar .............................3-11Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning .............5-16Operation flow of the Simulator ...........................7-3Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Direct Connection)..............................................3-6Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Network Connection) ..........................................3-6Operation for initial startup of the sensor.............3-9Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning ....................5-17Operation of the indicator light...........................1-12Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on ..........................................................8-11Operation when the Power is Turned on .............3-5Optional parts for the sensor ...............................1-8OS .....................................................................2-14Other methods of confirming a network connection........................................ A-31Outline tool ........................................................4-34Output Assignment ........................................... A-10Output circuit .....................................................2-10Output Settings ..................................................6-27


A

Index

Overview of IV Series ..........................................1-4Overview of Screen and Operation .....................3-2Overview of the program functions ......................6-6Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]........5-3

PPolarized visible light filter attachment ................1-8Polarizing filter attachment ..................................9-7Position Adjustment tool ....................................4-53Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - stranded wire) ......1-9Preparing the program functions .........................6-7Processing during an operation .........................5-33Program Details ....................................... 6-49, 7-21Program Details screen .................................... A-11Program Settings List ........................................6-45

RReducing the effect of illumination variation ......5-33Reducing the image blur....................................5-31Reducing the shininess of the glossy or metal surface .....................................................5-32Registering the image files saved in the PC ......5-23Registering the images from the image history saved in the sensor ...............5-21Registering the Live image as a master image ...4-21Registering the master image...................4-21, 7-11Registering the Master Image .............................8-8Registering the OK/NG images to be used for the Tool Auto Tuning ..........................................5-19Register the images taken with the sensor........5-19Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable ................................... A-26Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable ............................................ A-33Remedy when direct connection is unavailable ... A-25Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor ................................................. A-25Replacing the front cover.................................. A-36Required environment for the PC to be connected .....................................2-14Reset Statistics ..................................................6-47Resetting to the Factory Default Settings ..........3-10Response time for the error clear input .............8-12Response time for the external master registration input ................8-12Response time for the switch program input .....8-12Rotation Range........................................ 4-39, 4-59

SSave ..................................................................7-18Save Image .......................................................6-48Save Program Settings List ...............................7-18Save Statistics/Histogram Data in operation .....7-18Saving all the image histories individually .........6-18Saving images and screens displayed on the IV-Navigator individually ..............................6-22Saving procedure ..............................................6-22Saving the batch backup file................................7-3Saving the Sensor Settings and Images ...........6-21Saving the sensor settings or the image history ...6-21Screenshot ........................................................3-11Search Algorithm ...............................................4-40Searching for a sensor to be connected ..............3-7Security..............................................................6-34Selecting a display method for tools ....................5-7Selecting a tool according to its intended purpose ..........................................4-28Selecting the tool ...............................................5-38Selecting the tool by clicking it on the image .......5-6Selecting the tool from the status gauge .............5-6Selecting the tool whose information to be displayed ........................................................5-6Sensor ........................................................1-8, 1-11Sensor Information ............................................6-44[Sensor Information] tab ....................................6-31[Sensor] menu ...................................................6-47Sensor’s Internal Image History .............. 6-49, 7-21Sensor’s Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG) ............6-15Sensor Update...................................................6-47Setting a device name .......................................6-31Setting a search region............................ 4-37, 4-57Setting a sensitivity .................................. 4-37, 4-57Setting a tool name............................................4-38Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool .........4-42Setting items for the Outline tool .......................4-34Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool ...4-54Setting Logics ....................................................4-64[Setting] menu ......................................... 6-48, 7-20Setting range of the Output Assignment ............4-61Settings after initialization ................................. A-35Settings for disabling outlines .................. 4-38, 4-58Settings for the Trigger Options ...........................4-8Settings List ........................................................ A-6Settings Navigator ...............................................4-2Settings Navigator screen and operation flow .............................................. 4-4, 7-8Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup) screen ......... A-6Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation) ....7-8Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor .........................................................6-30


A

Index

Setting the Color Area/Area tool ........................4-44Setting the Image Optimization ...........................4-6Setting the Input and Output Information of the Sensor ......................6-26Setting the Outline tool ......................................4-35Setting the Output Assignment ..........................4-61Setting the password lock..................................6-34Setting the position adjustment tool...................4-55Setting the tool name.........................................4-49Setting the Total Status Conditions ....................4-63Setting the Trigger Options ........................ 4-8, 4-10Setting the upper limit ........................................4-48Setting up the PC ..............................................2-14[Setup Adjustment ] tab .....................................6-30Shortening the imaging processing time ...........5-38Shortening the Processing Time........................5-37Shortening the processing time of each tool .....5-38Shortening the processing time of the Color Area/Area tool ....................................5-39Shortening the processing time of the Outline tool ..................................................5-38Shortening the processing time of the position adjustment......................................5-39Show saved image file location .........................6-48Simulator .............................................................7-2Simulator screen and operation flow ...................7-4Specification of the circuit and current of the sensor ..........................................................2-10Specifications ......................................................9-2Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address ...........................................................3-8Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned target position ............................5-33Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool ...................5-36

If the area search becomes unstable due to unwanted colors being extracted ......5-36If the color you wish to judge cannot be extracted .................................................5-36

Stabilizing the Judgment Process .....................5-29Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear image of the target ......................5-29Stabilizing the Outline tool .................................5-35

If the detection becomes unstable due to the effect of the unwanted outline other than the target ....................................5-35If the match rate difference between the high and low-quality-targets is small ......5-36If the outline cannot be detected when the target becomes out of position ...............5-35If the outline of the target cannot be detected .......................................................5-36If the target tilts and the outline cannot be detected .....................5-36

Stabilizing the position adjustment ....................5-34If the outline of the reference target cannot be detected ......................................5-35If the position adjustment becomes unstable due to the effect of the unwanted outlines ........................................................5-34If the target tilts and the position adjustment becomes unstable .....................5-34

Starting an Operation ..........................................5-2Starting the IV-Navigator .....................................3-6Starting the IV Sensor Simulation......................7-17Starting the Settings Navigator ............................4-3Starting the Simulator ..........................................7-4Starting up the IVP-Converter ...........................6-51Statistics ............................................................6-46Statistics/Histogram Data ..................................6-45STATUS indicator light ...................................... A-30Status table......................................................... A-2System Configuration ..........................................1-2

TTerminate IV-Simulator ......................................7-19The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning .........5-16Things can be performed with the program functions ..............................................................6-6Tilt Correction ....................................................6-40Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)....................5-15Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration information .................5-27Tool Data ...........................................................6-46Tool Display Options ................................ 6-47, 7-20Tool settings.......................................................5-33Tool Settings ....................................................... A-7Transfer Program Settings ...................... 6-44, 6-45Transferring the backed up settings to the sensor ..........................................................6-23Transferring to the sensor ...................................7-5Trigger number ..................................................5-10Troubleshooting ................................................ A-16Turning on the power and starting an operation ...5-2Types of tools ....................................................4-28

UUpdate Sensor...................................................6-44Useful features during installation/adjustment .....6-3Useful features while running ..............................6-2User’s Manual ......................................... 6-50, 7-21Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment ..............5-32Using the digital zooming function .....................5-29Using the dome attachment....................... 2-6, 5-32Using the image files saved in the PC ...............5-15Using the image history saved in the sensor .....5-15


A

Index

Using the images taken in the Test mode ..........5-15Using the polarizing filter attachment ........ 2-7, 5-32Using the program functions (changing over)......6-9

When switching the program by the external input .........................................6-10When switching the program in the main screen in [Run] ................................6-9When switching the program in the Program Details screen ...........................6-9

Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) ..........1-5Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) .....................1-4

VVersion information .................................. 6-50, 7-21[View] menu ............................................. 6-46, 7-19Voltage input (When the PNP output is selected) ...................2-10

WWhen the NPN output is selected......................2-10When the PNP output is selected ......................2-10White Balance (for color type only)....................6-42[Window] menu ........................................ 6-49, 7-21

ZZoom ....................................................... 6-47, 7-20Zoom In .............................................................6-47Zoom Out...........................................................6-47

Revision history

Revision history Edition number Revision details

January, 2012 1st edition

August, 2012 2nd edition Addition of screw hole (1/4-20UNC) to the mounting adapter.Compatibility with German / Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional).Addition of the Simulator function.Correction of the “2.” of the Software License Agreement

December, 2012 4th edition Compatibility with Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean.Addition of Logic output / Total Status NG output / RUN output.Addition of the FTP client function.Compatibility with field networks (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET).Addition of the IVP-Convertor.

WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.

(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it is Buyer’s responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use. KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.

(3) The Products and any samples (“Products/Samples”) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.

(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply.

BUYER’S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.

E 1101-3

Copyright (c) 2012 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 244003E 1122-4 207GB Printed in Japan

Date post:	24-Oct-2015
Category:	Documents
Upload:	rimou000
View:	733 times
Download:	1 times